Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Service Reference Guide: HP Compaq dc7700 Business PC 1st Edition

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 268

service reference guide

HP Compaq dc7700 Business PC


1st Edition

This document provides information on the removal and replacement of all


parts as well as information on troubleshooting, Desktop Management, setup
utilities, PATA and SATA drives, safety, routine care, connector pin
assignments, POST error messages, and diagnostic indicator lights.

Document Part Number 433612-001


Service Reference Guide
HP Compaq dc7700 Business PC dc7700
1st Edition

Document Part Number: 433612-001

September 2006
© Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, and Windows XP are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S. and other countries.
Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying
such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be
photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard
Company.

WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily
Å harm or loss of life.

CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to
Ä equipment or loss of information.

Service Reference Guide


HP Compaq dc7700 Business PC
First Edition (September 2006)

Document Part Number: 433612-001


Contents

1 Installing the Operating System


1.1 Installing or Upgrading Device Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 Transferring Files and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.3 Creating a Disc Recovery Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

2 Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features


2.1 Power-On Self-Test (POST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 Computer Setup Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.2.1 Using Computer Setup (F10) Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.2.2 Computer Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.2.3 Recovering the Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.3 HP Insight Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.3.1 Accessing HP Insight Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2.3.2 Survey Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2.3.3 Test Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2.3.4 Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.3.5 Log Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.3.6 Help Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.3.7 Saving and Printing Information in HP Insight Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
2.3.8 Downloading the Latest Version of HP Insight Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18

3 Desktop Management
3.1 Initial Configuration and Deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.1 HP OpenView Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.2 Altiris Deployment Solution Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.3 HP Backup and Recovery Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.2 Remote System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.3 Software Updating and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.3.1 HP Client Management Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.3.2 HP System Software Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.3.3 HP Client Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.3.4 HP ProtectTools Security Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.3.5 HP Client Premium Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.3.6 HP Client Foundation Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.3.7 HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.3.8 HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.3.9 Intel vPro-branded PCs with Active Management Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.3.10Proactive Change Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.3.11Subscriber’s Choice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.3.12Retired Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9

Sercice Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 iii


Contents

3.4 ROM Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9


3.4.1 Remote ROM Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.4.2 HPQFlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.4.3 Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.4.4 Replicating the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.4.5 Dual-State Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
3.4.6 HP Web Site Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3.4.7 Industry Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3.5 Asset Tracking and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3.5.1 Password Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.5.2 Establishing a Setup Password Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.5.3 Establishing a Power-On Password Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
3.5.4 DriveLock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3.5.5 Smart Cover Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
3.5.6 Cable Lock Provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
3.5.7 Fingerprint Identification Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
3.6 Fault Notification and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
3.6.1 Drive Protection System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
3.6.2 Surge-Tolerant Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
3.6.3 Thermal Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26

4 Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features


4.1 SATA Hard Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.2 SATA Hard Drive Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.2.1 SATA Data Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.2.2 SATA Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.3 PATA Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4 ATA SMART Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.5 Hard Drive Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3

5 Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation


5.1 Chassis Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1.1 Convertible Minitower (CMT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1.2 Small Form Factor (SFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.1.3 Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.2 Electrostatic Discharge Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.1 Generating Static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.2 Preventing Electrostatic Damage to Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.3 Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.2.4 Grounding the Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.2.5 Recommended Materials and Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.3 Operating Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4 Routine Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.4.1 General Cleaning Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.4.2 Cleaning the Computer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.4.3 Cleaning the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.4.4 Cleaning the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.4.5 Cleaning the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7

iv 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Contents

5.5 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7


5.5.1 Power Supply Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.5.2 Tools and Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.5.3 Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.5.4 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.5.5 Hard Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.5.6 Lithium Coin Cell Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9

6 Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT)


Chassis
6.1 Preparation for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.2 Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.3 Hood Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.4 External Security Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.4.1 Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.4.2 Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.5 Computer Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.6 Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6.7 Front Drive Bezels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6.7.1 5.25” Drive Bezel Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6.7.2 Diskette Drive Bezel or Bezel Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
6.8 Cable Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
6.8.1 Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
6.9 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
6.10Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–12
6.11PCI Retainer Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16
6.12Expansion Card Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–18
6.13Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–19
6.13.1Drive Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–19
6.13.2Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20
6.13.3Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22
6.13.4Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25
6.14Front I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–26
6.15Power Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–27
6.16System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–28
6.17Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29
6.17.1Type 1 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30
6.17.2Type 2 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–31
6.17.3Type 3 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32
6.18Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33
6.19Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34
6.20Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35
6.21Chassis Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36
6.22Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37
6.23Changing from Desktop to Minitower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39
6.24Changing from Minitower to Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–42

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 v


Contents

7 Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis


7.1 Preparation for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.3 Hood Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.4 External Security Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.4.1 Security Clip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.4.2 Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.4.3 Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.5 Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.6 Front Drive Bezels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.7 Cable Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.7.1 Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.8 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.9 Vertically Oriented Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.9.1 Expansion Card Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.9.2 PCI Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.9.3 PCI Express Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.10PCI Riser Card Assembly and Backwall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.11Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.11.1Drive Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.11.2Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.11.3External 3.5-inch Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.11.4Primary Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.12Fan Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.13Front I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.14Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.15Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.16Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
7.17Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
7.18Chassis Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
7.19System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
7.20Drive Clutch Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
7.21Power Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
7.22Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
7.22.1Type 1 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
7.22.2Type 2 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
7.22.3Type 3 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48

8 Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT)


Chassis
8.1 Preparation for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.2 External Security Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
8.2.1 Installing a Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
8.2.2 Installing a Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
8.3 Computer Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
8.4 Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
8.5 Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–7
8.6 Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8

vi 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Contents

8.7 Chassis Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9


8.8 Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10
8.9 Cable Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–11
8.9.1 Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–12
8.10Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–13
8.11Expansion Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–14
8.12Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–15
8.13Expansion Card Retaining Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–17
8.14Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–18
8.15Front I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–20
8.16Heatsink Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21
8.17Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–22
8.18Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–24
8.19System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–25
8.20Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–26
8.20.1Type 1 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–27
8.20.2Type 2 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–28
8.20.3Type 3 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–29

A Connector Pin Assignments

B Power Cord Set Requirements

C POST Error Messages

D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

E System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators

F Memory

Index

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 vii


Contents

viii 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


1
Installing the Operating System

CAUTION: Do not add optional hardware or third-party devices to your computer until the operating
Ä system is successfully installed. Doing so may cause errors and may prevent the operating system from
installing properly.

Once the automatic installation has begun, DO NOT TURN OFF THE COMPUTER UNTIL THE PROCESS
IS COMPLETE. Turning off the computer during the installation process might damage the software that
runs the computer or prevent its proper installation.

✎ Be sure there is a 10.2-cm (4-inch) clearance at the back of the unit and above the monitor to
permit the required airflow.

The first time the computer is turned on, the operating system is automatically installed. This
takes approximately 10 minutes, depending on the operating system being installed. Carefully
read and follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation.

✎ Ifinstallation
the computer shipped with more than one operating system language on the hard drive, the
process could take up to 60 minutes.

If the computer was not shipped with a Microsoft operating system, some portions of this
documentation do not apply. For complete operating system installation and configuring
instructions, refer to the operating system documentation. Additional information is available in
online help.
Microsoft security updates are available on the Microsoft Web site.

1.1 Installing or Upgrading Device Drivers


To install optional hardware devices after the operating system installation is complete, the
drivers for each of the devices must also be installed.
If prompted for the I386 directory, replace the path specification with C:\i386, or use the Browse
button in the dialog box to locate the i386 folder. This action points the operating system to the
appropriate drivers.
Obtain the latest support software, including support software for the operating system from
www.hp.com/support. Select the appropriate country and language then, select Download
drivers and software, enter the model number of the computer, and press Enter.
You can also obtain the latest support software on CDs. The following Web site provides
information on how to purchase a support software CD subscription:
http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files/desktops/us/purchase.html.

✎ Ifto the computer has a writable optical drive, install the appropriate application to be able to write
the drive.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 1–1


Installing the Operating System

1.2 Transferring Files and Settings


Use the Microsoft Windows XP Files and Settings Transfer Wizard to move files and settings
from an old computer to a new one. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools
> Files and Settings Transfer Wizard. Follow the wizard to transfer the files and settings to the
new computer.

1.3 Creating a Disc Recovery Set


CAUTION: HP no longer ships the Restore Plus! CD with PCs. Instead, HP Backup and Recovery
Ä Manager is pre-loaded on each system. HP recommends the creation of a recovery CD as soon as the
computer has been set up. Creating the Restore Plus! CD set is important in the event that you ever need
to restore the system hard drive to its factory installed state.

HP Backup and Recovery Manager can create the Restore Plus CD set, This set includes the
Restore Plus CD, the Operating System CD, and any Supplemental Software CDs.

CAUTION: The Restore Plus CD set will not include any system settings or user data created after the
Ä initial system setup.

T o create the Restore Plus CD set:


1. Click Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and Recovery Manager to open
the Backup and Recovery Wizard, then click Next.
2. Select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system.
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.
The HP Backup and Recovery Manager can be used to back up data and system files to the hard
drive, to network drives, or to removable media, such as CDs, DVDs, or flash media. If data or
system files are lost, deleted, or corrupted, Backup and Recovery Manager allows you to retrieve
data or restore the last good system image.

CAUTION: HP recommends that a backup schedule be created immediately to ensure continued system
Ä and data protection. Automatic backups can be scheduled using the HP Backup and Recovery Wizard.
Recovery Points, Entire Drive Backups, and File Backups can be automatically backed up without user
intervention. HP recommends scheduling Recovery Points Backups to provide the most comprehensive
coverage.

✎ Ifrecovery
HP Backup and Recovery Manager is preinstalled, the Restore Plus CD set and the initial
point may be saved to disc as often as necessary, but only a single copy of the Microsoft
Windows CD can be created, due to licensing constraints.

You can access a user manual at Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and
Recovery Manager Manual.

If Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system is unavailable on the
system, the HP Restore Plus CD set can be obtained through product support on
http://welcome/country/us/en/contact_us.html.

1–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


2
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

Setup Utilities (F10) and diagnostic features provide information needed about the computer
system when contacting Customer Support. These tools can also be used to:
■ Change factory default settings and to set or change the system configuration, which may be
necessary when you add or remove hardware.
■ Determine if all of the devices installed on the computer are recognized by the system and
functioning properly.
■ Determine information about the operating environment of the computer.
■ Solve system configuration errors detected but not automatically fixed during the Power-On
Self-Test (POST).
■ Establish and manage passwords and other security features.
■ Establish and manage energy-saving timeouts.

✎ All features identified in this chapter may not be available on all HP products.
2.1 Power-On Self-Test (POST)
POST is a series of diagnostic tests that runs automatically when the system is turned on. POST
checks the following items to ensure that the computer system is functioning properly:
■ Keyboard
■ Memory modules
■ All mass storage devices
■ Processors
■ Controllers

✎ Ifwilltheneed
Power-On Password is set, a key icon appears on the screen while POST is running. You
to enter the password before continuing. Refer to Section 3.1, “Initial Configuration
and Deployment” for information on setting, deleting, or bypassing the password.

If POST finds an error in the system, an audible and/or visual message occurs. For POST error
messages and their solutions refer to Appendix C, “POST Error Messages.”

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 2–1


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

2.2 Computer Setup Utilities


Use Computer Setup Utilities (F10) to:
■ Change factory default settings.
■ Set the system date and time.
■ Set, view, change, or verify the system configuration, including settings for processor,
graphics, memory, audio, storage, communications, and input devices.
■ Modify the boot order of bootable devices such as hard drives, diskette drives, optical drives,
or USB flash media devices.
■ Enable Quick Boot, which is faster than Full Boot but does not run all of the diagnostic tests
run during a Full Boot. You can set the system to:
❏ always Quick Boot (default);
❏ periodically Full Boot (from every 1 to 30 days); or
❏ always Full Boot.
■ Select Post Messages Enabled or Disabled to change the display status of Power-On
Self-Test (POST) messages. Post Messages Disabled suppresses most POST messages, such
as memory count, product name, and other non-error text messages. If a POST error occurs,
the error is displayed regardless of the mode selected. To manually switch to Post Messages
Enabled during POST, press any key (except F1 through F12).
■ Establish an Ownership Tag, the text of which is displayed each time the system is turned on
or restarted.
■ Enter the Asset Tag or property identification number assigned by the company to this
computer.
■ Enable the power-on password prompt during system restarts (warm boots) as well as during
power-on.
■ Establish a setup password that controls access to Computer Setup (F10) Utility and the
settings described in this section.
■ Secure integrated I/O functionality, including the serial, USB, or parallel ports, audio, or
embedded NIC, so that they cannot be used until they are unsecured.
■ Enable or disable removable media boot ability.
■ Enable or disable legacy diskette write ability (when supported by hardware).
■ Solve system configuration errors detected but not automatically fixed during the Power-On
Self-Test (POST).
■ Replicate the system setup by saving system configuration information on diskette and
restoring it on one or more computers.
■ Execute self-tests on a specified ATA hard drive (when supported by drive).
■ Enable or disable DriveLock security (when supported by drive).

2–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

2.2.1 Using Computer Setup (F10) Utilities


Computer Setup can be accessed only by turning on the computer or restarting the system. To
access the Computer Setup Utilities menu, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start >Shut Down >Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.

✎ Ifpress
you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again
F10 when the monitor light turns green.

3. Select your language from the list and press the Enter key.
4. A choice of five headings appears in the Computer Setup Utilities menu: File, Storage,
Security, Power, and Advanced.
5. Use the arrow (left and right) keys to select the appropriate heading. Use the arrow (up and
down) keys to select the option you want, then press Enter. To return to the Computer Setup
Utilities menu, press Esc.
6. To apply and save changes, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
❏ If you have made changes that you do not want applied, select Ignore Changes and
Exit.
❏ To reset to factory settings or previously saved default settings, select Set Defaults and
Exit. This option will restore the original factory system defaults.

CAUTION: Do NOT turn the computer power OFF while the BIOS is saving the F10 Computer Setup
Ä changes because the CMOS could become corrupted. It is safe to turn off all power to the computer only
after exiting the F10 Setup screen.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 2–3


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

2.2.2 Computer Setup Menu


Heading Option Description
File System Information Lists:
• Product name
• SKU number (some models)
• Processor type/speed/stepping
• Cache size (L1/L2) (dual core processors have this listed twice)
• Installed memory size/speed and number of channels (single or
dual) (if applicable)
• Integrated MAC address for embedded, enabled NIC (if
applicable)
• System BIOS (includes family name and version)
• Chassis serial number
• Asset tracking number
About Displays copyright notice.
Set Time and Date Allows you to set system time and date.
Flash System ROM Allows you to select a drive containing a new BIOS.
(some models)
Replicated Setup Save to Removable Media
Saves system configuration, including CMOS, to a formatted
1.44-MB diskette, a USB flash media device, or a diskette-like
device (a storage device set to emulate a diskette drive).
Restore from Removable Media
Restores system configuration from a diskette, a USB flash media
device, or a diskette-like device.
Default Setup Save Current Settings as Default
Saves the current system configuration settings as the default.
Restore Factory Settings as Default
Restores the factory system configuration settings as the default.
Apply Defaults Applies the currently selected default settings and clears any
and Exit established passwords.
Ignore Changes Exits Computer Setup without applying or saving any changes.
and Exit
Save Changes and Saves changes to system configuration or default settings and exits
Exit Computer Setup.

✎ Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

2–4 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

Heading Option Description


Storage Device Lists all installed BIOS-controlled storage devices.
Configuration When a device is selected, detailed information and options are
displayed. The following options may be presented.
Diskette Type (Legacy Diskettes only)
Identifies the highest capacity media type accepted by the diskette
drive.
Options are 3.5" 1.44 MB, and 5.25" 1.2 MB.
Drive Emulation
Allows you to select a drive emulation type for a certain storage
device. (For example, a Zip drive can be made bootable by
selecting diskette emulation.)
Drive Type Emulation Options
ATAPI Zip drive None (treated as Other)
Diskette (treated as diskette drive)
Hard disk None (prevents BIOS data accesses and
disables it as a boot device)
Hard disk (treated as hard drive)
Legacy diskette No emulation options available
CD-ROM drive No emulation options available
ATAPI LS-120 None (treated as Other).
Diskette (treated as diskette drive).

✎ Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 2–5


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

Heading Option Description


Storage Device Multisector Transfers (ATA disks only)
(continued) Configuration Specifies how many sectors are transferred per multi-sector PIO
(continued) operation. Options (subject to device capabilities) are Disabled, 8,
and 16.
Transfer Mode (IDE devices only)
Specifies the active data transfer mode. Options (subject to device
capabilities) are PIO 0, Max PIO, Enhanced DMA, Ultra DMA 0,
and Max UDMA.
Translation Mode (ATA disks only)
Lets you select the translation mode to be used for the device. This
enables the BIOS to access disks partitioned and formatted on other
systems and may be necessary for users of older versions of UNIX
(e.g., SCO UNIX version 3.2). Options are Automatic, Bit-Shift,
LBA Assisted, User, and None

Ä CAUTION: Ordinarily, the translation mode selected


automatically by the BIOS should not be changed. If the selected
translation mode is not compatible with the translation mode that
was active when the disk was partitioned and formatted, the data
on the disk will be inaccessible.
Translation Parameters (ATA disks only)

✎ This feature appears only when User translation mode is selected.


Allows you to specify the parameters (logical cylinders, heads, and
sectors per track) used by the BIOS to translate disk I/O requests
(from the operating system or an application) into terms the hard
drive can accept. Logical cylinders may not exceed 1024. The
number of heads may not exceed 256. The number of sectors per
track may not exceed 63. These fields are only visible and
changeable when the drive translation mode is set to User.
Default Values IDE/SATA
Allows you to specify the default values for the Multisector Transfers,
Transfer Mode, and Translation Mode for ATA devices.
Storage Options Removable Media Boot
Enables/disables ability to boot the system from removable media.
Legacy Diskette Write
Enables/disables ability to write data to legacy diskettes.

✎ After saving changes to Removable Media Write, the computer


will restart. Turn the computer off, then on, manually.
BIOS DMA Data Transfers
Allows you to control how BIOS device I/O requests are serviced.
When “Enable” is selected, the BIOS will service ATA device read
and write requests with DMA data transfers. When “Disable” is
selected, the BIOS will service ATA device read and write requests
with PIO data transfers.

✎ Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

2–6 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

Heading Option Description


Storage Storage Options SATA Emulation
(continued) (continued) Allows you to choose how the SATA controller and devices are
accessed by the operating system. There are up to three supported
options: IDE, RAID, and AHCI.
IDE is the default option. Use this option for “normal” (non-RAID,
non-AHCI) configurations.
Select the RAID option to enable DOS and boot accesses to RAID
volumes. Use this option for RAID configurations under Windows
2000, XP, or Vista with the appropriate RAID device driver.

✎ The RAID device driver must be installed prior to attempting to


boot from a RAID volume. If you attempt to boot from a RAID
volume without the required device driver installed, the system
will crash (blue screen). Also, do not select the RAID option while
the DriveLock feature is enabled on any attached hard drives.
Doing so will cause the DriveLocked drives to remain locked and
inaccessible during subsequent reboots until another SATA
emulation mode is selected.
Select the ACHI option to enable DOS and boot accesses to SATA
devices using the AHCI interface. Select this mode if the target
operating system supports accessing the SATA devices via AHCI
(e.g. Windows Vista) and AHCI accesses are desired.

✎ Windows 2000 and Windows XP require a third-party device


driver to access SATA devices using the AHCI interface. If you
attempt to boot with either of these operating systems in AHCI
mode without the required device driver, the system will crash
(blue screen).
SATA 0 and 2
Allows you to enable or disable DOS and boot accesses to the
Primary channel of the first SATA controller. This feature only applies
when SATA emulation = IDE.

✎ Advanced operating systems like Windows may reenable the


channel.
SATA 1 and 3
Allows you to enable or disable DOS and boot accesses to the
Secondary channel of the first SATA controller. This feature only
applies when SATA emulation = IDE.

✎ Advanced operating systems like Windows may reenable the


channel.


DPS Self-Test Allows you to execute self-tests on ATA hard drives capable of
performing the Drive Protection System (DPS) self-tests.

✎ This selection will only appear when at least one drive capable of
performing the DPS self-tests is attached to the system.

✎ Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 2–7


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

Heading Option Description


Storage Boot Order Allows you to:
(continued) • Specify the order in which attached devices (such as a USB
flash media device, diskette drive, hard drive, optical drive, or
network interface card) are checked for a bootable operating
system image. Each device on the list may be individually
excluded from or included for consideration as a bootable
operating system source.
• Specify the order of attached hard drives. The first hard drive in
the order will have priority in the boot sequence and will be
recognized as drive C (if any devices are attached).

✎ MS-DOS drive lettering assignments may not apply after a


non-MS-DOS operating system has started.
Shortcut to Temporarily Override Boot Order
To boot one time from a device other than the default device
specified in Boot Order, restart the computer and press F9 when the
monitor light turns green. After POST is completed, a list of bootable
devices is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select the preferred
bootable device and press Enter. The computer then boots from the
selected non-default device for this one time.
Security Smart Card Allows you to enable/disable the Smart Card to be used in place of
Options (some the Power-On Password. This option only appears if a Smart Card
models) reader is attached to the system.
Setup Password Allows you to set and enables setup (administrator) password.

✎ If the setup password is set, it is required to change Computer


Setup options, flash the ROM, and make changes to certain plug
and play settings under Windows.
Power-On Allows you to set and enable power-on password. The power-on
Password password prompt appears after a power cycle. If the user does not
enter the correct power-on password, the unit will not boot.

✎ This password does not appear on warn boots, such as


CTRL+ALT+DEL or Restart from Windows, unless enabled
in Password Options, below.
Password Options Allows you to:
(This selection will • Lock legacy resources (appears if a setup password is set)
appear only if a
power-on • Enable/disable network server mode (appears if a power-on
password or setup password is set)
password is set.) • Specify whether the password is required for warm boot
(CTRL+ALT+DEL) (appears if a power-on password is set)
• Enable/Disable Setup Browse Mode (appears if a setup
password is set) (allows viewing, but not changing, the F10
Setup Options without entering setup password)

✎ Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

2–8 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

Heading Option Description


Security Smart Cover Allows you to:
(continued) (some models) • Lock/unlock the Cover Lock.
• Set the Cover Removal Sensor to Disable/Notify User/Setup
Password.

✎ Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that the
cover has been removed. Setup Password requires that the setup
password be entered to boot the computer if the sensor detects
that the cover has been removed.
Embedded Allows you to:
Security (This menu • Enable/disable the Embedded Security device.
only appears after
the Embedded • Reset the device to Factory Settings.
Security Device is • Enable/disable power-on authentication support (some
made available models).
under Device • Reset authentication credentials (some models).
Security)
This feature is supported on some models only.
Device Security Enables/disables serial ports, parallel port, all USB ports, system
audio, network controllers (some models), SMBus controller (some
models), and embedded security device (some models).
Network Service Enables/disables the computer’s ability to boot from an operating
Boot system installed on a network server. (Feature available on NIC
models only; the network controller must reside on the PCI bus or be
embedded on the system board.)
System IDs Allows you to set:
• Asset tag (18-byte identifier) and ownership Tag (80-byte
identifier displayed during POST).
• Chassis serial number or Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)
number. The UUID can only be updated if the current chassis
serial number is invalid. (These ID numbers are normally set in
the factory and are used to uniquely identify the system.)
• Keyboard locale setting (for example, English or German) for
System ID entry.
DriveLock Security Allows you to assign or modify a master or user password for hard
drives. When this feature is enabled, the user is prompted to
provide one of the DriveLock passwords during POST. If neither is
successfully entered, the hard drive will remain inaccessible until
one of the passwords is successfully provided during a subsequent
cold-boot sequence.

✎ This selection will only appear when at least one drive that
supports the DriveLock feature is attached to the system.

✎ Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 2–9


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

Heading Option Description


Security OS Security ✎ This selection is in effect only if the processor and operating
system being used comprehend and utilize this feature.
(continued)
• Data Execution Prevention (some models) (enable/disable).
Helps prevent OS security breaches.
• Intel Virtualization Technology (some models) (enable/disable).
Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and then
back on.
Power OS Power • Runtime Power Management - Enable/Disable. Allows certain
Management operating systems to reduce processor voltage and frequency
when the current software load does not require the full
capabilities of the processor.
• Idle Power Savings - Extended/Normal. Allows certain
operating systems to decrease the processors power
consumption when the processor is idle.
• ACPI S3 Hard Disk Reset - Enabling this causes the BIOS to
ensure hard disks are ready to accept commands after
resuming from S3 before returning control to the operating
system.
• ACPI S3 PS2 Mouse Wakeup - Enables or disables waking from
S3 due to PS2 mouse activity.
• USB Wake on Device Insertion - Allows system to wake from
Standby on USB device insertion.
Hardware Power SATA power management enables or disables SATA bus and/or
Management device power management.
Thermal Fan idle mode - This bar graph controls the minimum permitted fan
speed.

✎ This setting only changes the minimum fan speed. The fans are
still automatically controlled.

✎ Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

2–10 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

Heading Option Description


Advanced* Power-On Options Allows you to set:
*For • POST mode (QuickBoot, FullBoot, or FullBoot every 1-30 days).
advanced • POST messages (enable/disable).
users only
• MEBx Setup Prompt (enable/disable or hidden/displayed).
Enabling this feature displays the text CTRL+P=MEBx during
POST. Disabling this feature prevents the text from being
displayed. However, pressing CTRL+P still accesses the ME
BIOS Extension Setup Utility, which is used to configure
manageability settings.
• F9 prompt (enable/disable or hidden/displayed). Enabling
this feature will display the text F9=Boot Menu during POST.
Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed but
pressing F9 will still access the Shortcut Boot (Order) Menu
screen. See Storage > Boot Order for more information.
• F10 prompt (enable/disable or hidden/displayed). Enabling
this feature will display the text F10=Setup during POST.
Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed but
pressing F10 will still access the Setup screen.
• F12 prompt (enable/disable or hidden/displayed). Enabling
this feature will display the text F12=Network Service Boot
during POST. Disabling this feature prevents the text from being
displayed but pressing F12 will still force the system to attempt
booting from the network.
• Option ROM prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature
will cause the system to display a message before loading
options ROMs. (This feature is supported on some models only.)
• Remote wakeup boot source (remote server/local hard drive).
• After Power Loss (off/on/previous state): Set this option to ON:
• Off - causes the computer to remain powered off when power
is restored.
• On - causes the computer to power on automatically as soon
as power is restored.
• On - allows you to power on the computer using a power strip
switch, if the computer is connected to an electric power strip.
• Previous state - causes the computer to power on automatically
as soon as power is restored, if it was on when power was
lost.

✎ If you turn off power to your computer using the switch on a


power strip, you will not be able to use the suspend/sleep feature
or the Remote Management features.
• POST Delay (None, 5, 10, 15, or 20 seconds)
(enable/disable). Enabling this feature will add a user-specified
delay to the POST process. This delay is sometimes needed for
hard disks on some PCI cards that spin up very slowly; so slowly
that they are not ready to boot by the time POST is finished. The
POST delay also gives you more time to press F10 to enter
Computer (F10) Setup.

✎ Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 2–11


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

Heading Option Description


Advanced* Power-On Options Allows you to set: (continued)
(continued) (continued) • I/O APIC Mode (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will
*For allow Microsoft Windows Operating Systems to run optimally.
advanced This feature must be disabled for certain non-Microsoft
users only Operating Systems to work properly.
• Hyper-threading (enable/disable)
• Limit CPUID Maximum Value to 3 - Restricts the number of
CPUID functions reported by the microprocessor. Enable this
feature if booting to WinNT.
Execute Memory Restarts the computer and executes the POST memory test.
Test (some models)
BIOS Power-On Allows you to set the computer to turn on automatically at a time you
specify.
Onboard Devices Allows you to set resources for or disable onboard system devices
(diskette controller, serial port, or parallel port).
PCI Devices • Lists currently installed PCI devices and their IRQ settings.
• Allows you to reconfigure IRQ settings for these devices or to
disable them entirely. These settings have no effect under an
APIC-based operating system.
PCI VGA Displayed only if there are multiple PCI video adapters in the
Configuration system. Allows you to specify which VGA controller will be the
“boot” or primary VGA controller.

✎ In order to see this entry, you must enable integrated video


(Advanced > Device Options) and Save Changes and
Exit.

✎ Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

2–12 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

Heading Option Description


Advanced* Bus Options* On some models, allows you to enable or disable:
(continued) • PCI SERR# Generation.
*For • PCI VGA palette snooping, which sets the VGA palette
advanced snooping bit in PCI configuration space; only needed when
users only more than one graphics controller is installed.
Device Options Allows you to set:
• Printer mode (Bi-Directional, EPP & ECP, Output Only).
• Num Lock state at power-on (off/on).
• S5 Wake on LAN (enable/disable).
• To disable Wake on LAN during the off state (S5), use the arrow
(left and right) keys to select the Advanced > Device Options
menu and set the S5 Wake on LAN feature to “Disable.” This
obtains the lowest power consumption available on the computer
during S5. It does not affect the ability of the computer to Wake on
LAN from suspend or hibernation, but will prevent it from waking
from S5 via the network. It does not affect operation of the network
connection while the computer is on.
• If a network connection is not required, completely disable the
network controller (NIC) by using the arrow (left and right) keys to
select the Security > Device Security menu. Set the Network
Controller option to “Device Hidden.” This prevents the network
controller from being used by the operating system and reduces the
power used by the computer in S5.
• Processor cache (enable/disable).
• Unique Sleep State Blink Patterns. Allows you to choose an LED
blink pattern that uniquely identifies each sleep state.
• 3 blinks followed by 2-sec. pause = S3
• 4 blinks followed by 2-sec. pause = S4
• Integrated Video (enable/disable) Allows you to use integrated
video and PCI Up Solution video at the same time (available on
some models only).

✎ After Integrated Video is enabled and changes saved, a new


menu item appears under Advanced to allow you to select the
primary VGA controller video device.
Inserting a PCI or PCI Express video card automatically disables
Integrated Video. When PCI Express video is on, Integrated
Video must remain disabled.
• Internal speaker (some models) (does not affect external
speakers)
• Monitor Tracking (enable/disable). Allows BIOS to save
monitor asset information.

✎ Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 2–13


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

Heading Option Description


Advanced* Device option • NIC PXE Option ROM Download (enable/disable). The BIOS
(continued) (continued) contains an embedded NIC option ROM to allow the unit to
*For boot through the network to a PXE server. This is typically used
advanced to download a corporate image to a hard drive. The NIC
users only option ROM takes up memory space below 1MB commonly
referred to as DOS Compatibility Hole (DCH) space. This space
is limited. This F10 option will allow users to disable the
downloading of this embedded NIC option ROM thus giving
more DCH space for additional PCI cards which may need
option ROM space. The default will be to have the NIC option
ROM enabled.

✎ Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.

2.2.3 Recovering the Configuration Settings


This method of recovery requires that you first perform the Save to Removable Media command
with the Computer Setup (F10) Utility before Restore is needed.

✎ ItUSBis recommended that you save any modified computer configuration settings to a diskette, a
flash media device, or a diskette-like device (a storage device set to emulate a diskette
drive) and save the diskette or device for possible future use.

To restore the configuration, insert the diskette, USB flash media device, or other storage media
emulating a diskette with the saved configuration and perform the Restore from Removable
Media command with the Computer Setup (F10) Utility.

2.3 HP Insight Diagnostics

✎ HP Insight Diagnostics is included on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD with some


computer models only.

The HP Insight Diagnostics utility allows you to view information about the hardware
configuration of the computer and perform hardware diagnostic tests on the subsystems of the
computer. The utility simplifies the process of effectively identifying, diagnosing, and isolating
hardware issues.
The Survey tab is displayed when you invoke HP Insight Diagnostics. This tab shows the current
configuration of the computer. From the Survey tab, there is access to several categories of
information about the computer. Other tabs provide additional information, including diagnostic
test options and test results. The information in each screen of the utility can be saved as an html
file and stored on a diskette or USB HP Drive Key.
Use HP Insight Diagnostics to determine if all the devices installed on the computer are
recognized by the system and functioning properly. Running tests is optional but recommended
after installing or connecting a new device.
You should run tests, save the test results, and print them for reference.

✎ Third party devices may not be detected by HP Insight Diagnostics.

2–14 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

2.3.1 Accessing HP Insight Diagnostics


You must boot to the Documentation and Diagnostics CD, as described in the steps below, to
access HP Insight Diagnostics.
1. While the computer is on, insert the Documentation and Diagnostics CD into an optical drive
on the computer.
2. Shut down the operating system and turn off the computer.
3. Turn on the computer. The system will boot to the CD.

✎ Ifin the system does not boot to the CD in the optical drive, you may need to change the boot order
the Computer Setup (F10) utility so that the system attempts to boot to the optical drive before
booting to the hard drive. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation
and Diagnostics CD for more information.

4. When prompted, press the y key if you want to operate in Safe mode or any other key if you
want to operate in Regular mode.

✎ Regular mode is the default mode if no keys are pressed within the specified time frame. If the
screen remains blank after pressing any key other than y, try rebooting and select safe mode
when prompted.

5. Select the appropriate language and click Continue.

✎ Itwantis recommended that you accept the assigned default keyboard for your language unless you
to test your specific keyboard.

6. In the End User License Agreement page, click Agree if you agree with the terms. The HP
Insight Diagnostics utility launches with the Survey tab displayed.

2.3.2 Survey Tab


The Survey tab displays important system configuration information. In the View section on the
left side of the screen, you can select the Summary view to see limited configuration data or
select the Advanced view to see all the data in the selected category. Regardless of whether you
choose Advanced or Summary, the following categories of information are available on the
Survey tab:
All—Gives a listing of all categories of information about the computer.
Overview—Gives you a listing of general information about the computer.
Architecture—Provides system BIOS and PCI device information.
Asset Control—Shows asset tag, system serial number, and processor information.
Communication—Shows information about the computer parallel (LPT) and serial (COM) port
settings, plus USB and network controller information.
Graphics—Shows information about the graphics controller of the computer.
Input Devices—Shows information about the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices
connected to the computer.
Memory—Shows information about all memory in the computer. This includes memory slots on
the system board and any memory modules installed.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 2–15


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

Miscellaneous—Shows information obtained from the computer configuration memory


(CMOS), system management BIOS data, system board data, and diagnostics component
information.
Storage—Shows information about storage media connected to the computer. This list includes
all fixed disks, diskette drives, and optical drives.
System—Shows information about the system board, processor, chassis, and BIOS, plus internal
speaker and PCI bus information.

2.3.3 Test Tab


The Test tab allows you to choose various parts of the system to test. You can also choose the
type of test and testing mode.
There are three types of tests to choose from:
■ Quick Test—Provides a predetermined script where a sample of each hardware component
is exercised and requires no user intervention in either Unattended or Interactive mode.
■ Complete Test—Provides a predetermined script where each hardware component is fully
tested. There are more tests available in the Interactive mode, but these require user
intervention.
■ Custom Test—Provides the most flexibility in controlling the testing of a system. The
Custom Test mode allows you to specifically select which devices, tests, and test parameters
are run.
There are two test modes to choose from:
■ Interactive Mode—Provides maximum control over the testing process. The diagnostic
software will prompt you for input during tests that require your interaction.You may also
determine whether the test passed or failed.
■ Unattended Mode—Does not display prompts and requires no interaction. If errors are
found, they are displayed when testing is complete.
To begin testing:
1. Select the Test tab.
2. Select the tab for the type of test to be run: Quick, Complete, or Custom.
3. Select the Test Mode: Interactive or Unattended.
4. Choose how you want the test to be executed, either Number of Loops or Total Test Time.
When choosing to run the test over a specified number of loops, enter the number of loops to
perform. If you desire to have the diagnostic test for a specified time period, enter the amount
of time in minutes.
5. If performing a Quick Test or Complete Test, select the device to be tested from the
drop-down list. If performing a Custom Test, click the Expand button and select the devices
to be tested or click the Check All button to select all devices.
6. Click Begin Testing to start the test. The Status tab, which allows you to monitor the
progress of the test, is automatically displayed during the testing process. When the test is
complete, the Status tab shows whether the device passed or failed.
7. If errors are found, go to the Log tab and click the Error Log to display more detailed
information and recommended actions.

2–16 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

2.3.4 Status Tab


The Status tab displays the status of the selected tests. The type of test executed (Quick,
Complete, or Custom) is also displayed. The main progress bar displays the percent complete of
the current set of tests. While testing is in progress, a Cancel Testing button is displayed for use
if you want to cancel the test.
After testing has completed, the Cancel Testing button is replaced with a Retest button. The
Retest button will retest the last set of tests executed. This enables you to re-run the set of tests
without having to re-enter the data in the Test tab.
The Status tab also shows:
■ The devices being tested
■ The test status (running, passed, or fail) of each device being tested
■ The overall test progress of all devices being tested
■ The test progress for each device being tested
■ The elapsed test times for each device being tested

2.3.5 Log Tab


The Log tab contains a Test Log and an Error Log tab.
The Test Log displays all tests that have been executed, the number of times of execution, the
number of times failed, and the time it took to complete each test. The Clear Test Log button
will clear the contents of the Test Log.
The Error Log displays the tests for devices that have failed during the diagnostic testing and
includes the following columns of information.
■ The Device section displays the device tested.
■ The Test section displays the type of test run.
■ The Description section describes the error that the diagnostic test found.
■ The Recommended Repair will give a recommended action that should be performed to
resolve the failed hardware.
■ The Failed Count is the number of times the test has failed.
■ The Error Code provides a numerical code for the failure. The error codes are defined in the
Help tab.
■ The Clear Error Log button will clear the contents of the Error Log.

2.3.6 Help Tab


The Help tab contains an HP Insight Diagnostics tab, an Error Codes tab, and a Test
Components tab.
The HP Insight Diagnostics tab contains help topics and includes search and index features.
The Error Codes tab provides a description of each numerical error code that may appear in the
Error Log tab located on the Log tab. Each code has a corresponding error Message and a
Recommended Repair action that should help solve the problem. To find an error code
description quickly, enter the code in the box at the top of the tab and click the Find Error
Codes button.
The Test Components tab displays low level information on tests that are run.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 2–17


Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features

2.3.7 Saving and Printing Information in HP Insight Diagnostics


You can save the information displayed in the HP Insight Diagnostics Status and Log tabs to a
diskette or a USB 2.0 HP Drive Key (64MB or higher). You can not save to the hard drive. The
system will automatically create an html file that has the same appearance as the information
displayed on the screen.
1. Insert a diskette or USB 2.0 HP Drive Key (capacity must be 64MB or higher). USB 1.0
Drive Keys are not supported.
2. Click Save in the bottom right corner of the tab.
3. Select Save to the floppy or Save to USB key.
4. Enter a file name in the File Name box and click the Save button. An html file will be saved
to the inserted diskette or USB HP Drive Key.

✎ Do not remove the diskette or Drive Key until you see a message indicating that the total file has
been written to the media.

5. Print the information from the storage device used to save it.

✎ Toscreen
exit HP Insight Diagnostics, click the Exit Diagnostics button in the bottom left corner of the
then remove the Documentation and Diagnostics CD from the optical drive.

2.3.8 Downloading the Latest Version of HP Insight Diagnostics


1. Go to www.hp.com.
2. Click the Software and Download driver link.
3. Enter the product number (for example, dc7700) in the text box and press the Enter key.
4. Select the specific product.
5. Select the OS.
6. Click the Diagnostics link.
7. Select HP Insight Diagnostics Offline Edition.
8. Select the proper language and click Download.

✎ The download includes instructions on how to create the bootable CD.

2–18 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


3
Desktop Management

HP Client Management Solutions provides standards-based solutions for managing and


controlling desktops, workstations, and notebook PCs in a networked environment.
The key capabilities and features of desktop management are:
■ Initial configuration and deployment
■ Remote system installation
■ Software updating and management
■ ROM flash
■ Asset tracking and security
■ Fault notification and recovery

✎ Support for specific features described in this guide may vary by model or software version.
3.1 Initial Configuration and Deployment
HP computers come with a preinstalled system software image. After a brief software
“unbundling” process, the computer is ready to be used.
A customized software image may be deployed by:
■ Installing additional software applications after unbundling the preinstalled software image.
■ Using software deployment tools, such as HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager, HP
OpenView PC Configuration Management Solutions, or Altiris Deployment Solution, to
replace the preinstalled software with a customized software image.
■ Using a disk cloning process to copy the contents from one hard drive to another.
The best deployment method depends on your information technology environment and
processes. The PC Deployment section of the HP Lifecycle Solutions Web site
(http://h20219.www2.hp.com/services/cache/80906-0-0-225-121.html) provides information to
help you select the best deployment method.
The Restore Plus! CD, ROM-based setup, and ACPI hardware provide further assistance with
recovery of system software, configuration management and troubleshooting, and power
management.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–1


Desktop Management

3.1.1 HP OpenView Agent


The Radia Management Agent (RMA) used by both HP OpenView Client Configuration
Manager and HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solutions (Radia) is pre-loaded on
the computer. When installed, it enables communication with the HP OpenView management
console.
To install the Radia Management Agent:
1. Click Start.
2. Click All Programs.
3. Click HP Manageability.
4. Click Radia Management Agent Readme.
5. Review and follow the instructions contained in the Readme file to install the Radia
Management Agent.

3.1.2 Altiris Deployment Solution Agent


This program is pre-loaded on the computer. When installed, it enables communication with the
administrator Deployment Solution console.
To install Altiris Deployment Solution Agent:
1. Click Start.
2. Click All Programs.
3. Click Software Setup.
4. Click Next.
5. Scroll down and click on the link to install Altiris AClient.

3.1.3 HP Backup and Recovery Manager


HP Backup and Recovery Manager can create the Restore Plus! CD set. This set includes the
Restore Plus! CD, the Operating system CD, and any Supplemental Software CDs.

CAUTION: The Restore Plus! CD set will not include and system settings or user data created after the
Ä initial system setup.

To create the Restore Plus! CD set:


1. Click Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and Recovery Manager to open
the Backup and Recovery Wizard, then click Next.
2. Select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system.
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.
In addition to allowing you to create the Restore Plus! CD set, HP Backup and Recovery
Manager can be used to back up data and system files to the hard drive, to network drives, or to
removable media, such as CDs, DVDs, or flash media. If data or system files are lost, deleted, or
corrupted, Backup and Recovery Manager allows you to retrieve data or restore the last good
system image.

3–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Desktop Management

3.2 Remote System Installation


Remote System Installation allows you to start and set up your system using the software and
configuration information located on a network server by initiating the Preboot Execution
Environment (PXE). The Remote System Installation feature is usually used as a system setup
and configuration tool, and can be used for the following tasks:
■ Formatting a hard drive.
■ Deploying a software image on one or more new PCs.
■ Remotely updating the system BIOS in flash ROM. See Section 3.4.1, “Remote ROM
Flash.”
■ Configuring the system BIOS settings.
To initiate Remote System Installation, press F12 when the F12 = Network Service Boot
message appears in the lower-right corner of the HP logo screen. Follow the instructions on the
screen to continue the process. The default boot order is a BIOS configuration setting that can be
changed to always attempt to PXE boot.

3.3 Software Updating and Management


HP provides several tools for managing and updating software on desktops, workstations, and
notebooks:
■ HP System Software Manager
■ HP Client Manager
■ HP ProtectTools Security Manager
■ HP Client Premium Suite
■ HP Client Foundation Suite
■ HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager
■ HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solutions
■ HP Proactive Change Notification
■ HP Subscriber's Choice

3.3.1 HP Client Management Interface


HP Client Management Interface (HP CMI) provides an interface to simplify the integration of
business computers with popular industry system management tools (including Microsoft
Systems Management Server, IBM Tivoli Software, and HP OpenView Operations) and custom
inhouse developed management applications. Using HP CMI, systems management tools and
applications can request in-depth client inventory, receive health status information, and manage
system BIOS settings by communicating directly with the client computer, reducing the need for
agent or connector software to achieve integration.
When HP Client Management Interface is used in conjunction with system management
software, it can:
■ Request in-depth client inventory information - Capture detailed information about the
processors, hard drives, memory, BIOS, drivers, and sensor information (such as fan speed,
voltage, and temperature)

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–3


Desktop Management

■ Receive health status information - Subscribe for a wide range of client hardware alerts (such
as over-temperature, fan stall, and hardware configuration changes) to be sent to the system
management console, application, or to the local client computer. Alerts are sent real-time
when triggered by hardware events.
■ Manage system BIOS settings - Perform F10 functions including setting and changing the
BIOS passwords and computer boot order remotely from the system management console of
any or all of the client systems without having to visit each machine.

3.3.2 HP System Software Manager


HP System Software Manager (SSM) is a free utility that automates remote deployment of
device drivers and BIOS updates for networked HP business PCs. When SSM runs, it silently
(without user interaction) determines the revision levels of drivers and BIOS installed on each
networked client system and compares this inventory against system software SoftPaqs that have
been tested and stored in a central file store. SSM then automatically updates any down-revision
system software on the networked PCs to the later levels available in the file store. Since SSM
only allows distribution of SoftPaq updates to the correct client system models, administrators
can confidently and efficiently use SSM to keep system software updated.
System Software Manager integrates with enterprise software distribution tools such as
Microsoft Systems Management Server (SMS). Using SSM, you can distribute customer-created
or third-party updates that have been packaged in the SSM-format.
SSM may be downloaded at no charge by visiting www.hp.com/go/ssm.

3.3.3 HP Client Manager


HP Client Manager, developed with Altiris, is available free for supported HP business desktop,
notebook, and workstation models. SSM is integrated into HP Client Manager and enables
central tracking, monitoring, and management of the hardware aspects of HP client systems.
Use HP Client Manager to:
■ Get valuable hardware information such as CPU, memory, video, and security settings
■ Monitor system health to fix problems before they occur
■ Automatically acquire and install drivers and BIOS updates without visiting each PC
■ Remotely configure BIOS and security settings
■ Automate processes to quickly resolve hardware problems
Tight integration with HP Instant Support tools reduces hardware troubleshooting time.
■ Diagnostics—remotely run & view reports on HP desktop, notebook, and workstation
models
■ System Health Scan—check for known hardware issues in your installed base of HP client
systems
■ Active Chat—connect to HP customer support to resolve issues
■ HP Knowledgebase—link to expert information
■ Automated SoftPaq collection and delivery process for fast resolution of hardware problems
■ Identify, inventory, and initialize systems with HP ProtectTools embedded security chip
■ Option for health alerts to display locally on the client system

3–4 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Desktop Management

■ Report basic inventory information for non-HP clients


For more information on HP Client Manager, visit www.hp.com/go/clientmanager.

3.3.4 HP ProtectTools Security Manager


ProtectTools Security Manager software provides security features that help protect against
unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. Enhanced security functionality
is provided by the following modules:
■ Smart Card Security for ProtectTools
■ Embedded Security for ProtectTools
■ BIOS Configuration for ProtectTools
■ Credential Manager for ProtectTools
The modules available for your computer may vary depending on your model. For example,
Embedded Security for ProtectTools requires that the Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
embedded security chip (some models only) be installed on your computer, and Smart Card
Security for ProtectTools requires an optional smart card and reader.
ProtectTools modules may be preinstalled, preloaded, or available for purchase from the HP Web
site. Visit http://www.hp.com/products/security for more information.

3.3.5 HP Client Premium Suite


HP Client Premium Suite (HP CPS) is designed for organizations wanting full client hardware
and software lifecycle management from a single, Web-based management console. It combines:
■ HP Client Manager
■ HP Systems Insight Manager Connector
■ HP OpenView Connector
■ Altiris Client Management Suite - Level 1
■ Altiris Connector Solution
■ Altiris Local Recovery Pro
■ Altiris AuditExpress
For more information on HP Client Management Premium Suite, visit
http://www.hp.com/go/easydeploy.

3.3.6 HP Client Foundation Suite


The HP Client Foundation Suite (HP CFS) is designed for organizations wanting essential client
management functionality. It combines:
■ HP Client Manager
■ HP Systems Insight Manager Connector
■ Altiris Migration Suite
■ Altiris Local Recovery Pro
For more information about the HP Client Foundation Suite, visit
http://www.hp.com/go/easydeploy.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–5


Desktop Management

3.3.7 HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager


HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager is a simplified, out-of-the-box, and easy-to-use
solution that solves immediate PC software configuration management needs.
■ Integrated software management
❏ Inventory collection
❏ Operating system deployment and settings migration
❏ Patch management
❏ Software distribution
❏ Software usage metering
■ Integrated hardware management
❏ Remote control
❏ HP alert monitoring
❏ HP hardware driver and BIOS updates
❏ Integration with HP ProtectTools
❏ Free add-on support for Intel Active Management Technology (AMT)
❏ Free version for basic hardware management of HP desktops and notebooks, and
software and hardware management for HP Thin Clients.
For more information about the HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager, visit
http://www.managementsoftware.hp.com/products/ccm/index.html.

3.3.8 HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solutions


HP OpenView Configuration Management solutions automate the management of software such
as operating systems, applications, patches, content, and configuration settings to ensure that
each computing device is maintained in the right configuration.
Proven across enterprises of every size and complexity, HP’s adaptive, policy-based model for
software Configuration Management, automates the entire software lifecycle management
process - from discovery, deployment, and ongoing management through to migration and
retirement.
By substituting automation for manual intervention, HP helps its customers lower costs,
significantly reduce software related problems, and ensure the software supporting their business
operations is reliable and secure.
For more information on HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solution, visit
http://h20229.www2.hp.com/solutions/ascm/index.html.

3–6 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Desktop Management

3.3.9 Intel vPro-branded PCs with Active Management


Technology
Intel Active Management Technology (AMT) allows better discovery, healing, and protection of
networked computing assets. With AMT, PCs can be managed whether the system is on, off, or
the operating system is hung.
Intel vPro features include:
■ Hardware inventory information
■ Alerting
■ Power management—power on/off, cycle power
■ Remote diagnosis and repair
❏ Serial-over-LAN—allows console control of remote PC
❏ IDE-Redirect—allows system booting from a remote boot drive, disk, or ISO image
■ Hardware-based isolation and recovery—limit or cut off PC network access, if virus-like
activity is detected

✎ For an overview of Intel vPro technology, visit http://www.intel.com/vpro.


For HP-specific information on Intel vPro technology, see the white papers at
http://www.hp.com/support. Select your country and language, select See support and
troubleshooting information, enter the model number of the computer, and press Enter. In
the Resources category, click Manuals (guides, supplements, addendums, etc). Under
Quick jump to manuals by category, click White papers.

On Intel vPro-branded PCs, available management technologies include the following:


■ AMT
■ ASF
■ Virtualization Technology (VT)
ASF and AMT may not be configured at the same time, but both are supported.
To configure Intel vPro systems for AMT or ASF:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Microsoft Windows, click Start > Shut Down
> Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press the hot key, Ctrl+P, when the monitor light turns
green.

✎ NOTE If you do not press Ctrl+P at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and
again press Ctrl+P when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–7


Desktop Management

This hot-key enters the Intel Management Engine BIOS Execution (ME Bx) setup utility. This
utility allows the user to configure various aspects of the management technology. Configuration
options include:
■ ME Platform Configuration
❏ ME Platform State Control—enable/disable management engine
❏ ME Firmware Local Update—local enable/disable management of firmware updates
❏ LAN Controller—enable/disable integrated network controller
❏ ME Features Control—enable AMT, ASF, or none
❏ ME Power Control—configure management engine power policies
■ Intel AMT Configuration
❏ Change AMT Password—required in order to configure AMT (the default password is
admin)
❏ Host Name—allows administrator to assign a name to the client
❏ TCP/IP—allows administrator to assign an IP address or enable DHCP
❏ Provisioning Server—allows administrator to assign IP address of provisioning server
❏ Provision Model—allows administrator to configure either enterprise or SMB mode
❏ Set PID and PPS—allows administrator to provide pre-provisioning key (see HP’s white
paper, Intel vPro Provisioning)
❏ Un-Provision—allows administrator to reset AMT configuration to factory defaults
❏ VLAN—allows administrator to enable LAN virtualization support
❏ SOL/IDE-R—allows administrator to enable remote boot and control sessions
■ Change MEBx Password (HP highly recommends that this password be changed. The
default password is admin.)
In order to remotely manage AMT systems, the administrator must use a remote console that
supports AMT. Enterprise management consoles are available from suppliers such as HP
OpenView, Altiris and Microsoft SMS. In SMB mode, the client provides a Web browser
interface. To access this feature, open a browser from any other system on the network and enter
http://host_name:16992 where host_name is the name assigned to the system.
Alternatively, the IP address may be used in place of the host name.

3.3.10 Proactive Change Notification


The Proactive Change Notification program uses the Subscriber's Choice Web site in order to
proactively and automatically:
■ Send you Proactive Change Notification (PCN) e-mails informing you of hardware and
software changes to most commercial computers and servers, up to 60 days in advance
■ Send you e-mail containing Customer Bulletins, Customer Advisories, Customer Notes,
Security Bulletins, and Driver alerts for most commercial computers and servers
You create your own profile to ensure that you only receive the information relevant to a specific
IT environment. To learn more about the Proactive Change Notification program and create a
custom profile, visit http://h30046.www3.hp.com/subhub.php.

3–8 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Desktop Management

3.3.11 Subscriber’s Choice


Subscriber’s Choice is a client-based service from HP.
Based on your profile, HP will supply you with personalized product tips, feature articles, and/or
driver and support alerts/notifications.
Subscriber’s Choice Driver and Support Alerts/Notifications will deliver e-mails notifying you
that the information you subscribed to in your profile is available for review and retrieval. To
learn more about Subscriber’s Choice and create a custom profile, visit
http://h30046.www3.hp.com/subhub.php.

3.3.12 Retired Solutions


Two software packages, Altiris Local Recovery, and Dantz Retrospect, will no longer be
shipping on HP business desktops, notebooks, or workstations. Starting with new business
desktops, notebooks, and workstations released in 2006, all will ship with HP Backup and
Recovery Manager.

3.4 ROM Flash


The computer's BIOS is stored in a programmable flash ROM (read only memory). By
establishing a setup password in the Computer Setup (F10) Utility, you can protect the ROM
from being unintentionally updated or overwritten. This is important to ensure the operating
integrity of the computer. Should you need or want to upgrade the BIOS, you may download the
latest BIOS images from the HP driver and support page:
http:\\h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.

CAUTION: For maximum ROM protection, be sure to establish a setup password. The setup password
prevents unauthorized ROM upgrades. System Software Manager allows the system administrator to set
the setup password on one or more PCs simultaneously. For more information, visit
http://www.hp.com/go/ssm.

3.4.1 Remote ROM Flash


Remote ROM Flash allows the system administrator to safely upgrade the ROM on remote HP
computers directly from the centralized network management console. Enabling the system
administrator to perform this task remotely on multiple computers results in a consistent
deployment of, and greater control over, HP PC BIOS images over the network. It also results in
greater productivity and lower total cost of ownership.

✎ The computer must be powered on, or turned on through Remote Wakeup, to take advantage of
Remote ROM Flash.

For more information on Remote ROM Flash, refer to the HP Client Manager or System
Software Manager at http://h18000.www1.hp.com/im/prodinfo.html.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–9


Desktop Management

3.4.2 HPQFlash
The HPQFlash utility is used to locally update or restore the system BIOS on individual PCs
through a Windows operating system.
For more information on HPQFlash, visit http://www.hp.com/support/files and enter the product
name/number of the computer when prompted.

3.4.3 Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode


Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode permits system recovery in the unlikely event of a ROM
flash failure. For example, if a power failure were to occur during a BIOS upgrade, the ROM
flash would be incomplete. This would render the system BIOS unusable. The Boot Block is a
flash-protected section of the ROM that contains code that checks for a valid system BIOS image
when the system is turned on.
■ If the system BIOS image is valid, the system starts normally.
■ If the system BIOS image is not valid, a failsafe Boot Block BIOS provides enough
support to search removable media for BIOS image files. If an appropriate BIOS image file
is found, it is automatically flashed into the ROM.
When an invalid system BIOS image is detected, the system power LED will blink red 8 times,
one blink every second. Simultaneously, the speaker will beep 8 times. If the portion of the
system ROM containing the video option ROM image is not corrupt, “Boot Block Emergency
Recovery Mode” will be displayed on the screen.
To recover the system after it enters Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode, complete the
following steps:
1. Turn off the power.
2. Insert a diskette, CD, or USB flash device containing the desired BIOS image file in the root
directory.

✎ Note: The media must be formatted using the FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32 file system.
3. Turn on the computer.
If the system successfully reprograms the ROM, the system will automatically power off.
4. Remove the removable media used to upgrade the BIOS.
5. Turn the power on to restart the computer.

3–10 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Desktop Management

3.4.4 Replicating the Setup


The following procedures give an administrator the ability to easily copy one setup configuration
to other computers of the same model. This allows for faster, more consistent configuration of
multiple computers.

✎ Both procedures require a diskette drive or a supported USB flash media device, such as an HP
Drive Key.

Copying to Single Computer

CAUTION: A setup configuration is model-specific. File system corruption may result if source and target
Ä computers are not the same model. For example, do not copy the setup configuration from a dc7nnn PC
to a dx7nnn PC.

1. Select a setup configuration to copy. Turn off the computer. If you are in Windows, click
Start > Shut Down > Shut Down.
2. If you are using a USB flash media device, insert it now.
3. Turn on the computer.
4. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.

✎ IfF10youwhen
do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
the monitor light turns green to access the utility.

5. If you are using a a diskette, insert it now.


6. Select File > Replicated Setup > Save to Removable Media. Follow the instructions on the
screen to create the configuration diskette or USB flash media device.
7. Turn off the computer to be configured and insert the configuration diskette or USB flash
media device.
8. Turn on the computer to be configured.
9. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
10. Select File > Replicated Setup > Restore from Removable Media, and follow the
instructions on the screen.
11. Restart the computer when the configuration is complete.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–11


Desktop Management

Copying to Multiple Computers

CAUTION: A setup configuration is model-specific. File system corruption may result if source and target
Ä computers are not the same model. For example, do not copy the setup configuration from a dc7nnn PC
to a dx7nnn PC.

This method takes a little longer to prepare the configuration diskette or USB flash media device,
but copying the configuration to target computers is significantly faster.

✎ AIf Windows
bootable diskette is required for this procedure or to create a bootable USB flash media device.
XP is not available to use to create a bootable diskette, use the method for copying to
a single computer instead (see “Copying to Single Computer”).

1. Create a bootable diskette or USB flash media device. See “Supported USB Flash Media
Device” or “Unsupported USB Flash Media Device.”

CAUTION: Not all computers can be booted from a USB flash media device. If the default boot order in
Ä the Computer Setup (F10) Utility lists the USB device before the hard drive, the computer can be booted
from a USB flash media device. Otherwise, a bootable diskette must be used.

2. Select a setup configuration to copy. Turn off the computer. If you are in Windows, click
Start > Shut Down > Shut Down.
3. If you are using a USB flash media device, insert it now.
4. Turn on the computer.
5. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.

✎ IfF10youwhen
do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
the monitor light turns green to access the utility.

6. If you are using a diskette, insert it now.


7. Select File > Replicated Setup > Save to Removable Media. Follow the instructions on the
screen to create the configuration diskette or USB flash media device.
8. Download a BIOS utility for replicating setup (repset.exe) and copy it onto the configuration
diskette or USB flash media device. To obtain this utility, go to http://www.hp.com, click
Software and Driver Downloads, and enter the model number of the computer.
9. On the configuration diskette or USB flash media device, create an autoexec.bat file
containing the following command:
repset.exe
10. Turn off the computer to be configured. Insert the configuration diskette or USB flash media
device and turn the computer on. The configuration utility will run automatically.
11. Restart the computer when the configuration is complete.

3–12 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Desktop Management

Creating a Bootable Device

Supported USB Flash Media Device


Supported devices have a preinstalled image to simplify the process of making them bootable.
All HP or Compaq and most other USB flash media devices have this preinstalled image. If the
USB flash media device being used does not have this image, use the procedure later in this
section (see “Unsupported USB Flash Media Device”).
To create a bootable USB flash media device, you must have:
■ A supported USB flash media device.
■ A bootable DOS diskette with the FDISK and SYS programs. (If SYS is not available,
FORMAT may be used, but all existing files on the USB flash media device will be lost.)
■ A PC that is bootable from a USB flash media device.

CAUTION: Some older PCs may not be bootable from a USB flash media device. If the default boot
Ä order in the Computer Setup (F10) Utility lists the USB device before the hard drive, the computer can be
booted from a USB flash media device. Otherwise, a bootable diskette must be used.

1. Turn off the computer.


2. Insert the USB flash media device into one of the computer’s USB ports and remove all other
USB storage devices except USB diskette drives.
3. Insert a bootable DOS diskette with FDISK.COM and either SYS.COM or FORMAT.COM
into a diskette drive and turn on the computer to boot to the DOS diskette.
4. Run FDISK from the A:\ prompt by typing FDISK and pressing Enter. If prompted, click Yes
(Y) to enable large disk support.
5. Enter Choice [5] to display the drives in the system. The USB flash media device will be the
drive that closely matches the size of one of the drives listed. It will usually be the last drive
in the list. Note the letter of the drive.
USB flash media device drive: __________

CAUTION: If a drive does not match the USB flash media device, do not proceed. Data loss can occur.
Ä Check all USB ports for additional storage devices. If any are found, remove them, reboot the computer,
and proceed from step 4. If none are found, either the system does not support the USB flash media
device or the USB flash media device is defective. DO NOT proceed in attempting to make the USB flash
media device bootable.

6. Exit FDISK by pressing the Esc key to return to the A:\ prompt.
7. If your bootable DOS diskette contains SYS.COM, go to step 8. Otherwise, go to step 9.
8. At the A:\ prompt, enter SYS x: where x represents the drive letter noted above.

CAUTION: Be sure that you have entered the correct drive letter for the USB flash media device.
Ä
After the system files have been transferred, SYS will return to the A:\ prompt. Go to
step 13.
9. Copy any files you want to keep from your USB flash media device to a temporary directory
on another drive (for example, the system's internal hard drive).

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–13


Desktop Management

10. At the A:\ prompt, enter FORMAT /S X: where X represents the drive letter noted before.

CAUTION: Be sure that you have entered the correct drive letter for the USB flash media device.
Ä
FORMAT will display one or more warnings and ask you each time whether you want to
proceed. Enter Y each time. FORMAT will format the USB flash media device, add the
system files, and ask for a Volume Label.
11. Press Enter for no label or enter one if desired.
12. Copy any files you saved in step 9 back to your USB flash media device.
13. Remove the diskette and reboot the computer. The computer will boot to the USB flash
media device as drive C.

✎ The default boot order varies from computer to computer, and it can be changed in the Computer
Setup (F10) Utility.

If you have used a DOS version from Windows 9x, you may see a brief Windows logo screen. If
you do not want this screen, add a zero-length file named LOGO.SYS to the root directory of the
USB flash media device.

Return to “Copying to Multiple Computers.”

Unsupported USB Flash Media Device


To create a bootable USB flash media device, you must have:
■ USB flash media device.
■ Bootable DOS diskette with the FDISK and SYS programs. (If SYS is not available,
FORMAT may be used, but all existing files on the USB flash media device will be lost.)
■ PC that is bootable from a USB flash media device.

CAUTION: Some older PCs may not be bootable from a USB flash media device. If the default boot
Ä order in the Computer Setup (F10) Utility lists the USB device before the hard drive, the computer can be
booted from a USB flash media device. Otherwise, a bootable diskette must be used.

1. If there are any PCI cards in the system that have SCSI, ATA RAID, or SATA drives
attached, turn off the computer and unplug the power cord.

CAUTION: The power cord MUST be unplugged.


Ä
2. Open the computer and remove the PCI cards.
3. Insert the USB flash media device into one of the computer's USB ports and remove all other
USB storage devices except USB diskette drives. Close the computer cover.
4. Plug in the power cord and turn on the computer.
5. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.

✎ IfF10youwhen
do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
the monitor light turns green to access the utility.

3–14 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Desktop Management

6. Go to Advanced > PCI Devices to disable both the PATA and SATA controllers. When
disabling the SATA controller, note the IRQ to which the controller is assigned. You will
need to reassign the IRQ later. Exit setup, confirming the changes.
SATA IRQ: __________
7. Insert a bootable DOS diskette with FDISK.COM and either SYS.COM or FORMAT.COM
into a diskette drive and turn on the computer to boot to the DOS diskette.
8. Run FDISK and delete any existing partitions on the USB flash media device. Create a new
partition and mark it active. Exit FDISK by pressing the Esc key.
9. If the system did not automatically restart when exiting FDISK, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to
reboot to the DOS diskette.
10. At the A:\ prompt, type FORMAT C: /S and press Enter. Format will format the USB flash
media device, add the system files, and ask for a Volume Label.
11. Press Enter for no label or enter one if desired.
12. Turn off the computer and unplug the power cord. Open the computer and re-install any PCI
cards that were previously removed. Close the computer cover.
13. Plug in the power cord, remove the diskette, and turn on the computer.
14. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
15. Go to Advanced > PCI Devices and re-enable the PATA and SATA controllers that were
disabled in step 6. Put the SATA controller on its original IRQ.
16. Save the changes and exit. The computer will boot to the USB flash media device as drive C.

✎ The default boot order varies from computer to computer, and it can be changed in the Computer
Setup (F10) Utility. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation and
Diagnostics CD for instructions.

If you have used a DOS version from Windows 9x, you may see a brief Windows logo screen. If
you do not want this screen, add a zero-length file named LOGO.SYS to the root directory of the
USB flash media device.

Return to “Copying to Multiple Computers.”

3.4.5 Dual-State Power Button


With Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) enabled, the power button can
function either as an on/off switch or as a standby button. The stand-by feature does not
completely turn off power, but instead causes the computer to enter a low-power standby state.
This allows you to power down quickly without closing applications and to return quickly to the
same operational state without any data loss.
To change the power button’s configuration, complete the following steps:
1. Left click on the Start Button, then select Control Panel > Power Options.
2. In the Power Options Properties, select the Advanced tab.
3. In the Power Button section, select Stand by.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–15


Desktop Management

After configuring the power button to function as a standby button, press the power button to put
the system in a very low power state (standby). Press the button again to quickly bring the system
out of standby to full power status. To completely turn off all power to the system, press and hold
the power button for four seconds.

CAUTION: Do not use the power button to turn off the computer unless the system is not responding;
Ä turning off the power without operating system interaction could cause damage to or loss of data on the
hard drive.

3.4.6 HP Web Site Support


When making the transition to new or revised operating systems, it is important to implement the
support software designed for that operating system. If you plan to run a version of Microsoft
Windows that is different from the version included with the computer, you must install
corresponding device drivers and utilities to ensure that all features are supported and
functioning properly.
HP has made the task of locating, accessing, evaluating, and installing the latest support software
easier. You can download the software from http://www.hp.com/support.
The Web site contains the latest device drivers, utilities, and flashable ROM images needed to
run the latest Microsoft Windows operating system on the HP computer.

3.4.7 Industry Standards


HP management solutions integrate with other systems management applications, and are based
on industry standards, such as:
■ Web-Based Enterprise Management (WBEM)
■ Windows Management Interface (WMI)
■ Wake on LAN Technology
■ ACPI
■ SMBIOS
■ Pre-boot Execution (PXE) support

3.5 Asset Tracking and Security


Asset tracking features incorporated into the computer provide key asset tracking data that can be
managed using HP Systems Insight Manager, HP Client Manager or other system management
applications. Seamless, automatic integration between asset tracking features and these products
enables you to choose the management tool that is best suited to the environment and to leverage
the investment in existing tools.
HP also offers several solutions for controlling access to valuable components and information.
HP Embedded Security for ProtectTools, if installed, prevents unauthorized access to data and
checks system integrity and authenticates third-party users attempting system access. (For more
information, refer to the HP ProtectTools Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com.) Security
features such as HP Embedded Security for ProtectTools, the Smart Cover Sensor and the Smart
Cover Lock, available on some models, help to prevent unauthorized access to the internal
components of the personal computer. By disabling parallel, serial, or USB ports, or by disabling

3–16 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Desktop Management

removable media boot capability, you can protect valuable data assets. Memory Change and
Smart Cover Sensor alerts can be automatically forwarded to system management applications to
deliver proactive notification of tampering with a computer’s internal components.

✎ HP Embedded Security for ProtectTools, the Smart Cover Sensor, and the Smart Cover Lock are
available as options on some systems.

Use the following utilities to manage security settings on the HP computer:


■ Locally, using the Computer Setup Utilities. See the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on
the Documentation and Diagnostics CD included with the computer for additional
information and instructions on using the Computer Setup Utilities. Some computers also
have HP BIOS Configuration for ProtectTools, which is a Windows-based component of
ProtectTools that allows administrators to configure BIOS security settings from within the
running OS.
■ Remotely, using HP Client Manager Software or System Software Manager. This software
enables the secure, consistent deployment and control of security settings from a simple
command-line utility.
The following table and sections refer to managing security features of the computer locally
through the Computer Setup (F10) Utilities.

Security Features Overview


Option Description
Setup Password Allows you to set and enable setup (administrator) password.

✎ If the setup password is set, it is required to change


Computer Setup options, flash the ROM, and make changes
to certain plug and play settings under Windows.
Power-On Password Allows you to set and enable power-on password.
Password Options Allows you to specify whether the password is required for
(This selection will appear only warm boot (CTRL+ALT+DEL) (appears if a power-on
if a power-on password is set.) password is set).

Pre-Boot Authorization Allows you to enable/disable the Smart Card to be used in


place of the Power-On Password.
Smart Cover Allows you to:
• Enable/disable the Cover Lock.
• Enable/disable the Cover Removal Sensor.

✎ Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that
the cover has been removed. Setup Password requires that
the setup password be entered to boot the computer if the
sensor detects that the cover has been removed.
This feature is supported on some models only and will only
appear if a Smart Card reader is attached to the system.
Embedded Security Allows you to:
• Enable/disable the Embedded Security device.
• Reset the device to Factory Settings.

✎ For more information about Computer Setup, see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Support for security features may vary depending on your specific computer configuration.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–17


Desktop Management

Security Features Overview (Continued)


Option Description
Device Security Enables/disables serial ports, parallel port, front USB ports,
system audio, network controllers (some models), and SCSI
controllers (some models).
Network Service Boot Enables/disables the computer’s ability to boot from an
operating system installed on a network server. (Feature
available on NIC models only; the network controller must
reside on the PCI bus or be embedded on the system board.)
System IDs Allows you to set:
• Asset tag (18-byte identifier) and ownership Tag (80-byte
identifier displayed during POST).
• Chassis serial number or Universal Unique Identifier
(UUID) number. The UUID can only be updated if the
current chassis serial number is invalid. (These ID numbers
are normally set in the factory and are used to uniquely
identify the system.)
• Keyboard locale setting (for example, English or German)
for System ID entry.
DriveLock (some models) Allows you to assign or modify a master or user password for
certain ATA hard drives. When this feature is enabled, the user
is prompted to provide one of the DriveLock passwords during
POST. If neither is successfully entered, the hard drive will
remain inaccessible until one of the passwords is successfully
provided during a subsequent cold-boot sequence.

✎ This selection will only appear when at least one drive that
supports ATA Security is attached to the system.

✎ For more information about Computer Setup, see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Support for security features may vary depending on your specific computer configuration.

3–18 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Desktop Management

Mechanical Security Features


Feature Purpose How It Is Established
Memory Change Alerts Detects when memory modules This feature is automatic.
have been added, moved, or
removed; notifies user and
system administrator.
Cable Lock Provision Inhibits access to the interior of Install a cable lock to secure
the computer to prevent the computer to a fixed
unwanted configuration object.
changes or component
removal. Can also be used to
secure the computer to a fixed
object to prevent theft.
Security Loop Provision Inhibits access to the interior of Install a lock in the security
the computer to prevent loop to prevent unwanted
unwanted configuration configuration changes or
changes or component component removal.
removal.

3.5.1 Password Security


The power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the computer by requiring entry of a
password to access applications or data each time the computer is turned on or restarted. The
setup password specifically prevents unauthorized access to Computer Setup, and can also be
used as an override to the power-on password. That is, when prompted for the power-on
password, entering the setup password instead will allow access to the computer.
A network-wide setup password can be established to enable the system administrator to log in to
all network systems to perform maintenance without having to know the power-on password,
even if one has been established.

3.5.2 Establishing a Setup Password Using Computer Setup


If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools
Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com. Establishing a setup password through Computer
Setup prevents reconfigration of the computer (use of the Computer Setup (F10) utility) until the
password is entered.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.

✎ IfF10youwhen
do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
the monitor light turns green to access the utility.

3. Select Security, then select Setup Password and follow the instructions on the screen.
4. Before exiting, Select File > Save Changes and Exit.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–19


Desktop Management

3.5.3 Establishing a Power-On Password Using Computer Setup


Establishing a power-on password through Computer Setup prevents access to the computer
when power is turned on, unless the password is entered. When a power-on password is set,
Computer Setup presents Password Options under the Security menu. Password options include
Password Prompt on Warm Boot. When Password Prompt on Warm Boot is enabled, the
password must also be entered each time the computer is rebooted.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.

✎ IfF10youwhen
do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
the monitor light turns green to access the utility.

3. Select Security, then Power-On Password and follow the instructions on the screen.
4. Before exiting, select File > Save Changes and Exit.

Entering a Power-On Password


To enter a power-on password, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. When the key icon appears on the monitor, type the current password, then press Enter.

✎ Type carefully; for security reasons, the characters you type do not appear on the screen.
If you enter the password incorrectly, a broken key icon appears. Try again. After three
unsuccessful tries, you must turn off the computer, then turn it on again before you can continue.

Entering a Setup Password


If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools
Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com.
If a setup password has been established on the computer, you will be prompted to enter it each
time you run Computer Setup.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.

✎ IfF10youwhen
do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
the monitor light turns green to access the utility.

3. When the key icon appears on the monitor, type the setup password, then press Enter.

✎ Type carefully; for security reasons, the characters you type do not appear on the screen.
If you enter the password incorrectly, a broken key icon appears. Try again. After three
unsuccessful tries, you must turn off the computer, then turn it on again before you can continue.

3–20 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Desktop Management

Changing a Power-On or Setup Password


If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools
Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. To change the Power-On password, go to step 3.
To change the Setup password, as soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the
monitor light turns green to enter Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if
necessary.

✎ IfF10youwhen
do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
the monitor light turns green to access the utility.

3. When the key icon appears, type the current password, a slash (/) or alternate delimiter
character, the new password, another slash (/) or alternate delimiter character, and the new
password again as shown:
current password/new password/new password

✎ Type carefully; for security reasons, the characters you type do not appear on the screen.
4. Press Enter.
The new password takes effect the next time you turn on the computer.

✎ Refer to “National Keyboard Delimiter Characters” for information about the alternate delimiter
characters. The power-on password and setup password may also be changed using the Security
options in Computer Setup.

Deleting a Power-On or Setup Password


If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools
Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. To delete the Power-On password, go to step 3.
To delete the Setup password, as soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the
monitor light turns green to enter Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if
necessary.

✎ IfF10youwhen
do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
the monitor light turns green to access the utility.

3. When the key icon appears, type the current password followed by a slash (/) or alternate
delimiter character as shown:
current password/
4. Press Enter.

✎ Refer to the National Keyboard Delimiter Character table below for information about the
alternate delimiter characters. The power-on password and setup password may also be changed
using the Security options in Computer Setup.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–21


Desktop Management

National Keyboard Delimiter Characters


Each keyboard is designed to meet country-specific requirements. The syntax and keys that you
use for changing or deleting your password depend on the keyboard that came with your
computer.
National Keyboard Delimiter Characters
Arabic / Greek - Russian /
Belgian = Hebrew . Slovakian -
BHCSY* - Hungarian - Spanish -
Brazilian / Italian - Swedish/Finnish /
Chinese / Japanese / Swiss -
Czech - Korean / Taiwanese /
Danish - Latin American - Thai /
French ! Norwegian - Turkish .
French Canadian é Polish - U.S. English /
German - Portuguese -
* For Bosnia-Herzegovina, Croatia, Slovenia, and Yugoslavia

Clearing Passwords
If you forget the password, you cannot access the computer. Refer to the Troubleshooting Guide
on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for instructions on clearing passwords.
If the system is equiped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools Security
Manager Guide at www.hp.com.

3.5.4 DriveLock
DriveLock is an industry-standard security feature that prevents unauthorized access to the data
on ATA hard drives. DriveLock has been implemented as an extension to Computer Setup. It is
only available when hard drives that support the ATA Security command set are detected.
DriveLock is intended for HP customers for whom data security is the paramount concern. For
such customers, the cost of the hard drive and the loss of the data stored on it is inconsequential
when compared with the damage that could result from unauthorized access to its contents. In
order to balance this level of security with the practical need to accommodate a forgotten
password, the HP implementation of DriveLock employs a two-password security scheme. One
password is intended to be set and used by a system administrator while the other is typically set
and used by the end-user. There is no “back-door” that can be used to unlock the drive if both
passwords are lost. Therefore, DriveLock is most safely used when the data contained on the
hard drive is replicated on a corporate information system or is regularly backed up.
In the event that both DriveLock passwords are lost, the hard drive is rendered unusable. For
users who do not fit the previously defined customer profile, this may be an unacceptable risk.
For users who do fit the customer profile, it may be a tolerable risk given the nature of the data
stored on the hard drive.

3–22 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Desktop Management

Using DriveLock
When one or more hard drives that support the ATA Security command set are detected, the
DriveLock option appears under the Security menu in Computer Setup. The user is presented
with options to set the master password or to enable DriveLock. A user password must be
provided in order to enable DriveLock. Since the initial configuration of DriveLock is typically
performed by a system administrator, a master password should be set first. HP encourages
system administrators to set a master password whether they plan to enable DriveLock or keep
it disabled. This will give the administrator the ability to modify DriveLock settings if the drive is
locked in the future. Once the master password is set, the system administrator may enable
DriveLock or choose to keep it disabled.
If a locked hard drive is present, POST will require a password to unlock the device. If a
power-on password is set and it matches the device’s user password, POST will not prompt the
user to re-enter the password. Otherwise, the user will be prompted to enter a DriveLock
password. On a cold boot, either the master or the user password may be used. On a warm boot,
enter the same password used to unlock the drive during the preceding cold-boot. Users will have
two attempts to enter a correct password. On a cold boot, if neither attempt succeeds, POST will
continue but the drive will remain inaccessible. On a warm boot or restart from Windows, if
neither attempt succeeds, POST will halt and the user will be instructed to cycle power.

DriveLock Applications
The most practical use of the DriveLock security feature is in a corporate environment. The
system administrator would be responsible for configuring the hard drive which would involve,
among other things, setting the DriveLock master password and a temporary user password. In
the event that the user forgets the user password or the equipment is passed on to another
employee, the master password can always be used to reset the user password and regain access
to the hard drive.
HP recommends that corporate system administrators who choose to enable DriveLock also
establish a corporate policy for setting and maintaining master passwords. This should be done to
prevent a situation where an employee intentionally or unintentionally sets both DriveLock
passwords before leaving the company. In such a scenario, the hard drive would be rendered
unusable and require replacement. Likewise, by not setting a master password, system
administrators may find themselves locked out of a hard drive and unable to perform routine
checks for unauthorized software, other asset control functions, and support.
For users with less stringent security requirements, HP does not recommend enabling DriveLock.
Users in this category include personal users or users who do not maintain sensitive data on their
hard drives as a common practice. For these users, the potential loss of a hard drive resulting
from forgetting both passwords is much greater than the value of the data DriveLock has been
designed to protect. Access to Computer Setup and DriveLock can be restricted through the
Setup password. By specifying a Setup password and not giving it to end users, system
administrators are able to restrict users from enabling DriveLock.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–23


Desktop Management

3.5.5 Smart Cover Sensor


Cover Removal Sensor, available on some models, is a combination of hardware and software
technology that can alert you when the computer cover or side panel has been removed. There are
three levels of protection, as described in the following table.

Smart Cover Sensor Protection Levels


Level Setting Description
Level 0 Disabled Smart Cover Sensor is disabled (default).
Level 1 Notify User When the computer is restarted, the screen
displays a message indicating that the
computer cover or side panel has been
removed.
Level 2 Setup Password When the computer is restarted, the screen
displays a message indicating that the
computer cover or side panel has been
removed. You must enter the setup
password to continue.

✎ These settings can be changed using Computer Setup. For more information about Computer
Setup, see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.

Setting the Smart Cover Sensor Protection Level


To set the Smart Cover Sensor protection level, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.

✎ IfF10youwhen
do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
the monitor light turns green to access the utility.

3. Select Security > Smart Cover > Cover Removal Sensor, and select the desired security
level.
4. Before exiting, select File > Save Changes and Exit.

Smart Cover Lock


The Smart Cover Lock is a software-controllable cover lock featured on some HP computers.
This lock prevents unauthorized access to the internal components. Computers ship with the
Smart Cover Lock in the unlocked position.

CAUTION: For maximum cover lock security, be sure to establish a setup password. The setup password
Ä prevents unauthorized access to the Computer Setup utility.

✎ The Smart Cover Lock is available as an option on some systems.

3–24 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Desktop Management

Locking the Smart Cover Lock


To activate and lock the Smart Cover Lock, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.

✎ IfF10youwhen
do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
the monitor light turns green to access the utility.

3. Select Security > Smart Cover > Cover Lock > Lock option.
4. Before exiting, select File > Save Changes and Exit.

Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock


1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.

✎ IfF10youwhen
do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
the monitor light turns green to access the utility.

3. Select Security > Smart Cover > Cover Lock > Unlock.
4. Before exiting, select File > Save Changes and Exit.

Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key


If you enable the Smart Cover Lock and cannot enter your password to disable the lock, you will
need a Smart Cover FailSafe Key to open the computer cover. You will need the key in any of the
following circumstances:
■ Power outage
■ Startup failure
■ PC component failure (such as processor or power supply)
■ Forgotten password

CAUTION: The Smart Cover FailSafe Key is a specialized tool available from HP. Be prepared; order
Ä this key before you need one (Tamper-resistant wrench PN 166527-001 or tamper-resistant bits PN
166527-002).

For more information about using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key, please see the Removal and
Replacement chapter for the specific chassis.

3.5.6 Cable Lock Provision


The rear panel of the computer accommodates a cable lock so that the computer can be
physically secured to a work area. For illustrated instructions, please see the Removal and
Replacement chapter for the specific chassis.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 3–25


Desktop Management

3.5.7 Fingerprint Identification Technology


Eliminating the need to enter user passwords, HP Fingerprint Identification Technology tightens
network security, simplifies the login process, and reduces the costs associated with managing
corporate networks. Affordably priced, it is not just for high-tech, high-security organizations
anymore.

✎ Support for Fingerprint Identification Technology varies by model.


For more information, visit http://h18004.www1.hp.com/products/security/.

3.6 Fault Notification and Recovery


Fault Notification and Recovery features combine innovative hardware and software technology
to prevent the loss of critical data and minimize unplanned downtime.
If the computer is connected to a network managed by HP Client Manager, the computer sends a
fault notice to the network management application. With HP Client Manager, you can also
remotely schedule diagnostics to automatically run on all managed PCs and create a summary
report of failed tests.

3.6.1 Drive Protection System


The Drive Protection System (DPS) is a diagnostic tool built into the hard drives installed in
some HP computers. DPS is designed to help diagnose problems that might result in unwarranted
hard drive replacement.
When HP computers are built, each installed hard drive is tested using DPS, and a permanent
record of key information is written onto the drive. Each time DPS is run, test results are written
to the hard drive. Your service provider can use this information to help diagnose conditions that
caused you to run the DPS software. Refer to the Troubleshooting Guide for instructions on using
DPS.

3.6.2 Surge-Tolerant Power Supply


An integrated surge-tolerant power supply provides greater reliability when the computer is hit
with an unpredictable power surge. This power supply is rated to withstand a power surge of up
to 2000 volts without incurring any system downtime or data loss.

3.6.3 Thermal Sensor


The thermal sensor is a hardware and software feature that tracks the internal temperature of the
computer. This feature displays a warning message when the normal range is exceeded, which
gives you time to take action before internal components are damaged or data is lost.

3–26 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


4
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and
Features

✎ Serial ATA = SATA


Parallel ATA = PATA

HP only supports the use of SATA hard drives on these models of computer. The USDT model is
the only product that supports a PATA optical drive. No PATA drives are supported on any other
model.

4.1 SATA Hard Drives

Serial ATA Hard Drive Characteristics


Number of pins/conductors in data cable 7/7
Number of pins in power cable 15
Maximum data cable length 39.37 in (100 cm)
Data interface voltage differential 400-700 mV
Drive voltages 3.3 V, 5V, 12 V
Jumpers for configuring drive N/A
Data transfer rate 3.0 Gb/s

SATA connectors on the system board are color coded to make identification easier.

Attachment
SATA Identification Color Port Sequence
Primary channel, device 0 Dark blue SATA 0 1
Primary channel, device 1 Light Blue SATA 2 4
Secondary channel, device 0 White SATA 1 2
Secondary channel, device 1 Orange SATA 3 3

✎ If there is an error on the application of the attach rules, a POST error message may be displayed.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 4–1


Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features

4.2 SATA Hard Drive Cables


4.2.1 SATA Data Cable
Always use an HP approved SATA 3.0 Gb/s cable as it is fully backwards compatible with the
SATA 1.5 Gb/s drives.
Current HP desktop products ship with SATA 3.0 Gb/s hard drives.
SATA data cables are susceptible to damage if overflexed. Never crease a SATA data cable and
never bend it tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
The SATA data cable is a thin, 7-pin cable designed to transmit data for only a single drive. As
shown in the table, each cable has 3 grounds, and 4 transmit/receive pins.

Pin Number Usage Device Plug Host Plug


P1 Ground Ground Ground
P2* A+ Transmit data Receive data
P3* A- Transmit data Receive data
P4 Ground Ground Ground
P5** B- Receive data Transmit data
P6** B+ Receive data Transmit data
P7 Ground Ground Ground
*P2 and P3 differential signal pair
**P5 and P6 differential signal pair

4.2.2 SATA Power Cable

Pin Usage Notes Pin Usage Notes


P1 V3.3 3.3 V power P9 V5 5 V power
P2 V3.3 3.3 V power P10 Ground
P3 V3.3 3.3 V power P11 Ground
P4 Ground P12 Ground
P5 Ground P13 V 12 12 V power
P6 Ground P14 V12 12 V power
P7 V5 5 V power P15 V12 12 V power
P8 V5 5 V power

4–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features

4.3 PATA Device Information


The USDT model is the only product that supports a PATA optical drive. No PATA drives are
supported on any other model.

4.4 ATA SMART Drives


The Self Monitoring Analysis and Recording Technology (SMART) ATA drives for the HP
Personal Computers have built-in drive failure prediction that warns the user or network
administrator of an impending failure or crash of the hard drive. The SMART drive tracks fault
prediction and failure indication parameters such as reallocated sector count, spin retry count,
and calibration retry count. If the drive determines that a failure is imminent, it generates a fault
alert.

4.5 Hard Drive Capacities


The combination of the file system and the operating system used in the computer determines the
maximum usable size of a drive partition. A drive partition is the largest segment of a drive that
may be properly accessed by the operating system. A single hard drive may therefore be
subdivided into a number of unique drive partitions in order to make use of all of its space.
Because of the differences in the way that drive sizes are calculated, the size reported by the
operating system may differ from that marked on the hard drive or listed in the computer
specification. Drive size calculations by drive manufacturers are bytes to the base 10 while
calculations by Microsoft are bytes to the base 2.

Drive/Partition Capacity Limits


Maximum Size
File Controller
System Type Operating System Partition Drive
FAT 32 ATA Windows 2000/ XP 32 GB 2 TB
NTFS ATA Windows NT/2000/XP 2 TB 2 TB

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 4–3


Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features

4–4 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


5
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and
Disassembly Preparation

This chapter provides general service information for the computer. Adherence to the procedures
and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.

CAUTION: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to the
Ä system board. You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the computer
to prevent system board or component damage.

5.1 Chassis Designations


5.1.1 Convertible Minitower (CMT)

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 5–1


Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation

5.1.2 Small Form Factor (SFF)

5.1.3 Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT)

5–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation

5.2 Electrostatic Discharge Information


A sudden discharge of static electricity from your finger or other conductor can destroy
static-sensitive devices or microcircuitry. Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, but damage
occurs. An electronic device exposed to electrostatic discharge (ESD) may not appear to be
affected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. The device may function
normally for a while, but it has been degraded in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy.
Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in many cases, the
discharge contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions.

5.2.1 Generating Static


The following table shows that:
■ Different activities generate different amounts of static electricity.
■ Static electricity increases as humidity decreases.

Relative Humidity
Event 55% 40% 10%
Walking across carpet 7,500 V 15,000 V 35,000 V
Walking across vinyl floor 3,000 V 5,000 V 12,000 V
Motions of bench worker 400 V 800 V 6,000 V
Removing DIPs* from plastic tube 400 V 700 V 2,000 V
Removing DIPs* from vinyl tray 2,000 V 4,000 V 11,500 V
Removing DIPs* from Styrofoam 3,500 V 5,000 V 14,500 V
Removing bubble pack from PCB 7,000 V 20,000 V 26,500 V
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box 5,000 V 11,000 V 21,000 V
*These are then multi-packaged inside plastic tubes, trays, or Styrofoam.

✎ 700 volts can degrade a product.


5.2.2 Preventing Electrostatic Damage to Equipment
Many electronic components are sensitive to ESD. Circuitry design and structure determine the
degree of sensitivity. The following packaging and grounding precautions are necessary to
prevent damage to electric components and accessories.
■ To avoid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers such as tubes, bags, or
boxes.
■ Protect all electrostatic parts and assemblies with conductive or approved containers or
packaging.
■ Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free stations.
■ Place items on a grounded surface before removing them from their container.
■ Always be properly grounded when touching a sensitive component or assembly.
■ Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
■ Place reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies in protective packaging or
conductive foam.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 5–3


Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation

5.2.3 Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment


Use the following equipment to prevent static electricity damage to equipment:
■ Wrist straps are flexible straps with a maximum of one-megohm ± 10% resistance in the
ground cords. To provide proper ground, a strap must be worn snug against bare skin. The
ground cord must be connected and fit snugly into the banana plug connector on the
grounding mat or workstation.
■ Heel straps/Toe straps/Boot straps can be used at standing workstations and are
compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats,
use them on both feet with a maximum of one-megohm ± 10% resistance between the
operator and ground.

Static Shielding Protection Levels


Method Voltage
Antistatic plastic 1,500
Carbon-loaded plastic 7,500
Metallized laminate 15,000

5.2.4 Grounding the Work Area


To prevent static damage at the work area, use the following precautions:
■ Cover the work surface with approved static-dissipative material. Provide a wrist strap
connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment.
■ Use static-dissipative mats, foot straps, or air ionizers to give added protection.
■ Handle electrostatic sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCB
laminate. Handle them only at static-free work areas.
■ Turn off power and input signals before inserting and removing connectors or test
equipment.
■ Use fixtures made of static-safe materials when fixtures must directly contact dissipative
surfaces.
■ Keep work area free of nonconductive materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and
Styrofoam.
■ Use field service tools, such as cutters, screwdrivers, and vacuums, that are conductive.

5.2.5 Recommended Materials and Equipment


Materials and equipment that are recommended for use in preventing static electricity include:
■ Antistatic tape
■ Antistatic smocks, aprons, or sleeve protectors
■ Conductive bins and other assembly or soldering aids
■ Conductive foam
■ Conductive tabletop workstations with ground cord of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance
■ Static-dissipative table or floor mats with hard tie to ground
■ Field service kits

5–4 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation

■ Static awareness labels


■ Wrist straps and footwear straps providing one-megohm +/- 10% resistance
■ Material handling packages
■ Conductive plastic bags
■ Conductive plastic tubes
■ Conductive tote boxes
■ Opaque shielding bags
■ Transparent metallized shielding bags
■ Transparent shielding tubes

5.3 Operating Guidelines


To prevent overheating and to help prolong the life of the computer:
■ Keep the computer away from excessive moisture, direct sunlight, and extremes of heat and
cold.
■ Operate the computer on a sturdy, level surface. Leave a 10.2-cm (4-inch) clearance on all
vented sides of the computer and above the monitor to permit the required airflow.
■ Never restrict the airflow into the computer by blocking any vents or air intakes. Do not place
the keyboard, with the keyboard feet down, directly against the front of the desktop unit as
this also restricts airflow.
■ Occasionally clean the air vents on all vented sides of the computer. Lint, dust, and other
foreign matter can block the vents and limit the airflow. Be sure to unplug the computer
before cleaning the air vents.

✎ Ifprevent
operating in a dusty environment, periodic cleaning of heatsink and fans is recommended to
overheating.

■ Never operate the computer with the cover or side panel removed.
■ Do not stack computers on top of each other or place computers so near each other that they
are subject to each other’s re-circulated or preheated air.
■ If the computer is to be operated within a separate enclosure, intake and exhaust ventilation
must be provided on the enclosure, and the same operating guidelines listed above will still
apply.
■ Keep liquids away from the computer and keyboard.
■ Never cover the ventilation slots on the monitor with any type of material.
■ Install or enable power management functions of the operating system or other software,
including sleep states.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 5–5


Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation

5.4 Routine Care


5.4.1 General Cleaning Safety Precautions
1. Never use solvents or flammable solutions to clean the computer.
2. Never immerse any parts in water or cleaning solutions; apply any liquids to a clean cloth
and then use the cloth on the component.
3. Always unplug the computer when cleaning with liquids or damp cloths.
4. Always unplug the computer before cleaning the keyboard, mouse, or air vents.
5. Disconnect the keyboard before cleaning it.
6. Wear safety glasses equipped with side shields when cleaning the keyboard.

5.4.2 Cleaning the Computer Case


Follow all safety precautions in Section 5.4.1 before cleaning the computer.
To clean the computer case, follow the procedures described below:
■ To remove light stains or dirt, use plain water with a clean, lint-free cloth or swab.
■ For stronger stains, use a mild dishwashing liquid diluted with water. Rinse well by wiping it
with a cloth or swab dampened with clear water.
■ For stubborn stains, use isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol. No rinsing is needed as the alcohol will
evaporate quickly and not leave a residue.
■ After cleaning, always wipe the unit with a clean, lint-free cloth.
■ Occasionally clean the air vents on the computer. Lint and other foreign matter can block the
vents and limit the airflow.

5.4.3 Cleaning the Keyboard


Follow all safety precautions in Section 5.4.1 before cleaning the keyboard.
To clean the tops of the keys or the keyboard body, follow the procedures described in Section
5.4.2.
When cleaning debris from under the keys, review all rules in Section 5.4.1 before following
these procedures:

CAUTION: Use safety glasses equipped with side shields before attempting to clean debris from under
Ä the keys.

■ Visible debris underneath or between the keys may be removed by vacuuming or shaking.
■ Canned, pressurized air may be used to clean debris from under the keys. Caution should be
used as too much air pressure can dislodge lubricants applied under the wide keys.
■ If you remove a key, use a specially designed key puller to prevent damage to the keys. This
tool is available through many electronic supply outlets.

CAUTION: Never remove a wide leveled key (like the space bar) from the keyboard. If these keys are
Ä improperly removed or installed, the keyboard may not function properly.

5–6 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation

■ Cleaning under a key may be done with a swab moistened with isopropyl alcohol and
squeezed out. Be careful not to wipe away lubricants necessary for proper key functions. Use
tweezers to remove any fibers or dirt in confined areas. Allow the parts to air dry before
reassembly.

5.4.4 Cleaning the Monitor


■ Wipe the monitor screen with a clean cloth moistened with water or with a towelette
designed for cleaning monitors. Do not use sprays or aerosols directly on the screen; the
liquid may seep into the housing and damage a component. Never use solvents or flammable
liquids on the monitor.
■ To clean the monitor body follow the procedures in Section 5.4.2.

5.4.5 Cleaning the Mouse


Before cleaning the mouse, ensure that the power to the computer is turned off.
■ Clean the mouse ball by first removing the retaining plate and the ball from the housing. Pull
out any debris from the ball socket and wipe the ball with a clean, dry cloth before
reassembly.
■ To clean the mouse body, follow the procedures in Section 5.4.2.

5.5 Service Considerations


Listed below are some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during the disassembly
and assembly of the computer.

5.5.1 Power Supply Fan


The power supply fan is a variable-speed fan based on the temperature in the power supply.

CAUTION: The cooling fan is always on when the computer is in the “On” mode. The cooling fan is off
Ä when the computer is in “Standby,” “Suspend,” or “Off” modes.

You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the computer to prevent
system board or component damage.

5.5.2 Tools and Software Requirements


To service the computer, you need the following:
■ Torx T-15 screwdriver (HP screwdriver with bits, PN 161946-001)
■ Torx T-15 screwdriver with small diameter shank (for certain front bezel removal)
■ Flat-bladed screwdriver (may sometimes be used in place of the Torx screwdriver)
■ Phillips #2 screwdriver
■ Diagnostics software
■ HP tamper-resistant T-15 wrench (Smart Cover FailSafe Key, PN 166527-001) or
HP tamper-resistant bits (Smart Cover FailSafe Key, PN 166527-002)

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 5–7


Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation

5.5.3 Screws
The screws used in the computer are not interchangeable. They may have standard or metric
threads and may be of different lengths. If an incorrect screw is used during the reassembly
process, it can damage the unit. HP strongly recommends that all screws removed during
disassembly be kept with the part that was removed, then returned to their proper locations.

✎ Metric screws have a black finish.


U.S. screws have a silver finish and are used on hard drives only.

✎ As each subassembly is removed from the computer, it should be placed away from the work
area to prevent damage.

5.5.4 Cables and Connectors


Most cables used throughout the unit are flat, flexible cables. These cables must be handled with
care to avoid damage. Apply only the tension required to seat or unseat the cables during
insertion or removal from the connector. Handle cables by the connector whenever possible. In
all cases, avoid bending or twisting the cables, and ensure that the cables are routed in such a way
that they cannot be caught or snagged by parts being removed or replaced.

CAUTION: When servicing this computer, ensure that cables are placed in their proper location during
Ä the reassembly process. Improper cable placement can damage the computer.

5.5.5 Hard Drives


Handle hard drives as delicate, precision components, avoiding all physical shock and vibration.
This applies to failed drives as well as replacement spares.
■ If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective
packaging and label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
■ Do not remove hard drives from the shipping package for storage. Keep hard drives in their
protective packaging until they are actually mounted in the CPU.
■ Avoid dropping drives from any height onto any surface.
■ If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, turn off the computer. Do not remove a hard
drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.
■ Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a
drive, avoid touching the connector. For more information about preventing electrostatic
damage, refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information.”
■ Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
■ Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic
fields such as monitors or speakers.

5–8 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation

5.5.6 Lithium Coin Cell Battery


The battery that comes with the computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a
minimum lifetime of about three years.
See the appropriate removal and replacement chapter for the chassis you are working on in this
guide for instructions on the replacement procedures.

WARNING: This computer contains a lithium battery. There is a risk of fire and chemical burn if the
Å battery is handled improperly. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, dispose in
water or fire, or expose it to temperatures higher than 140ºF (60ºC). Do not attempt to recharge the
battery.

Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general
N household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public
collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 5–9


Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation

5–10 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


6
Removal and Replacement Procedures -
Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper
service. After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the diagnostics
utility to verify that all components operate properly.

✎ Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
6.1 Preparation for Disassembly
See Chapter 5, “Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation” for initial
procedures.
1. Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer (Section 6.2,
“Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock” and Section 6.4, “External Security Devices”).
2. Close any open software applications.
3. Exit the operating system.
4. Remove any diskette, compact disc, or media card from the computer.
5. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
Ä
CAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as
Ä the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be disconnected
before servicing a unit.

6. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
8. Lay the computer down on its side to achieve a safe working position.

✎ During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing. Keep all
screws with the units removed.

CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the wrong
Ä screw in an application may damage the unit.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–1


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.2 Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock


If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock use Computer Setup to unlock the lock. Refer to the
Desktop Management Guide on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for more information
about the Smart Cover Lock.
If you cannot access Computer Setup to unlock the cover you will need to remove the locking
solenoid by using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key (Spare part number 166527-001 or
166527-002). Once the solenoid has been deactivated or removed the access panel can be
removed.
The Smart Cover FailSafe Key will be needed in any of the following circumstances:
■ Power outage
■ Startup failure
■ Processor or power supply failure
■ Lost password
1. Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key, remove the two tamper-proof screws that secure the
Smart Cover Lock to the inside of the chassis.

2. Remove the access panel (Section 6.5).


To reattach the Smart Cover Lock, secure the lock in place with the two tamper-proof screws.

6–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.3 Hood Sensor


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Disconnect the hood sensor cable from the system board.
4. Slide the hood sensor switch towards the front of the computer 1 and lower it down through
the slot 2.

To install the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedure.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–3


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.4 External Security Devices


6.4.1 Cable Lock
The cable lock may be used to secure the computer access panel to the chassis and, at the same
time, secure the computer to a fixed object.

6.4.2 Padlock
A padlock may be used by itself to secure the access panel to the computer chassis. A padlock
may also be used with a security cable to secure the computer to a fixed object.

6–4 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.5 Computer Access Panel


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).

CAUTION: Before removing the computer access panel, ensure that the computer is turned off and that
Ä the power cord is disconnected from the electrical outlet.

2. Lift up on the access panel handle 1, slide the access panel back about 2.5 cm (1 inch), then
lift it off the unit 2.

To install the computer cover, reverse the removal procedure.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–5


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.6 Front Bezel


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Push up on the two release tabs 1, then rotate the front bezel away from the chassis to
release it 2.

To reinstall the front bezel, reverse the removal procedure

6–6 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.7 Front Drive Bezels


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).

6.7.1 5.25” Drive Bezel Blank


Gently pull the subpanel, with the bezel blanks secured in it, away from the front bezel, then
remove the desired bezel blank.

CAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when pulling it away from the front bezel. Pulling the subpanel
Ä away at an angle could damage the pins that align it with the front bezel.

To install a bezel blank, reverse the removal procedure.

✎ When replacing the subpanel, ensure that the aligning pins and any remaining bezel blanks are in
their proper orientation. The logo in the subpanel should be located at the bottom of the subpanel
when properly oriented.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–7


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.7.2 Diskette Drive Bezel or Bezel Blank


Press up on the two small retaining clips 1 on the bottom of the bezel insert, press down on the
two small retaining clips 2 on the top of the insert, and push the cover out of the front bezel 3.

To install a bezel or a bezel blank, reverse the removal procedure.

6–8 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.8 Cable Management


Always follow good cable management practices when working inside the computer.
■ Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heatsink.
■ Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like
these are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.
■ Keep cables clear of sliding or moveable parts to prevent them from being cut or crimped
when the parts are moved.
■ When folding a flat ribbon cable, never fold to a sharp crease. Sharp creases may damage the
wires.
■ Some flat ribbon cables come prefolded. Never change the folds on these cables.
■ Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.
■ Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
■ Never crease a SATA data cable.
■ Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push
cables down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.
When removing the power supply power cables from the P1 or P3 connectors on the system
board, always follow these steps:
1. Squeeze on the top of the retaining latch attached to the cable end of the connector 1.
2. Grasp the cable end of the connector and pull it straight up 2.

CAUTION: Always pull the connector - NEVER pull on the cable. Pulling on the cable could damage the
Ä cable and result in a failed power supply.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–9


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.8.1 Cable Connections


All cable connectors on the system board are color-coded for ease of installation.
System Board Connections

System Board Connector, Name, Description


and Connector Color

P10, FLOPPY, black Diskette drive

P70, CPU FAN Heatsink fan

P8, CHASSIS FAN Chassis fan

P5, F_PNL Front power button/LED

P23, FRNT USB, Yellow Front I/O audio

P24, FRNT AUD, black Front I/O USB cable

P6, SPKR Internal speaker

P52, SERIAL B Serial port

P124, HLCK Hood lock solenoid

P125, HSENSE Hood sensor

Power Supply Cable Connections

Power Supply Connector ID Description

P1 Main power

P3 CPU power

P4, White 1st ODD or 2nd HDD if no ODD present, SATA1

P5, Dark blue 1st Hard drive, SATA0

P6 PATA/Zip/Media card reader

P8 Diskette drive

P9 SATA hard/optical drive - Bay 1 only

P10, Light bluet 2nd or 4th HDD if no Odd presenT, SATA2

P11, Orange 2nd ODD or 3rd HDD if no ODD present,


SATA3

6–10 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.9 Memory
CAUTION: The memory module sockets have gold metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or oxidation
resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards.
Ä Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching
a grounded metal object. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more information.

CAUTION: When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so
Ä may damage the module.

1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).


2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).

WARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to
Å cool before touching.

3. Open both latches of the memory module socket 1, and insert the memory module into the
socket 2. Refer to Appendix F, “Memory” for the correct sequence for installing memory
modules to get optimal performance.

✎ Aonmemory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with the tab
the memory socket.

4. Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and
properly seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position (3).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for any additional modules that you want to install.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–11


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

✎ The computer automatically recognizes the additional memory when the computer is turned on.
To reassemble the computer, reverse the removal procedure.

✎ IftheyouSmart
normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and enable
Cover Sensor.

6.10 Expansion Cards


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Locate the correct vacant expansion socket on the system board and the corresponding
expansion slot on the back of the computer chassis.
4. Push down and out on the two green thumb tabs inside the chassis and rotate the expansion
card retention latch up.

6–12 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

5. If you are installing an expansion card in a vacant socket, remove the appropriate expansion
slot cover on the back of the chassis. Pull the slot cover straight up to release it from the
chassis frame.

6. If you are removing an expansion card from a standard expansion socket, hold the card at
each end and carefully rock it back and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket.
Lift the expansion card straight up to release it from the chassis frame. Be sure not to scrape
the card against other components.

✎ Before removing an installed expansion card, disconnect any cables that may be attached to the
expansion card.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–13


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

7. If you are removing a PCI Express card from a x16 PCI Express socket with a retention
mechanism, pull the retention arm away from the socket then carefully rock the card back
and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket. Lift the expansion card straight up
then pull it in toward the center of the chassis to release it from the chassis frame. Be sure not
to scrape the card against other components.

8. Store the removed card in anti-static packaging.


9. If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the
open slot and continue with step 12.
If you are installing a new expansion card, continue with step 11.

CAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or expansion slot
Ä cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.

6–14 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

10. Slide the bracket on the end of the expansion card down into the slot on the back of the
chassis and press the card down firmly into the socket on the system board.

✎ When you install an expansion card, make sure you press firmly on the card so that the whole
connector seats properly in the expansion card socket on the system board.

11. Close the expansion slot latch, making sure that it snaps firmly into place.
12. Connect external cables to the installed card and internal cables to the system board as
needed.
13. Replace the computer access panel.
14. If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and
enable the Smart Cover Sensor.
15. Reconfigure the computer, if necessary. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on
the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for instructions about using Computer Setup.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–15


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.11 PCI Retainer Latch


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Locate the correct vacant expansion socket on the system board and the corresponding
expansion slot on the back of the computer chassis.
4. Push down and out on the two green thumb tabs inside the chassis and rotate the expansion
card retention latch up.

5. Use a thin flat blade screwdriver to pry up on the broken plastic latches 1, then complete the
removal by pulling the latches off the pivoting bar 2.

6–16 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6. Slide the pivoting bar to the right 1, then lift the left end 2 to remove it from the chassis. To
replace the bar, slide it into the socket on the right 1, lower it into position 3, and slide it to
the left 4 to secure it in place.

7. With the bar in a slightly rotated position, install the latches through the openings in the back
of the chassis and press them firmly in place on the rotating bar.

✎ The green latches are marked “R” and “L” for your convenience.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–17


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.12 Expansion Card Guide


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove any expansion cards that might be in the way (Section 6.10).
4. Compress the retaining tabs 1 that secure the card guide to the chassis and remove the guide
from the chassis 2.

To install the expansion card guide, reverse the removal procedure.

6–18 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.13 Drives
The computer supports up to six drives that may be installed in various configurations.
This Section describes the procedure for replacing or upgrading the storage drives. A Torx T-15
screwdriver is needed to remove and install the guide screws on a drive.

CAUTION: Make sure personal files on the hard drive are backed up to an external storage device
Ä before removing the hard drive. Failure to do so will result in data loss. After replacing the primary hard
drive, you will need to run the Restore Plus! CD to load the factory-installed files.

6.13.1 Drive Positions

Drive Positions
Item Description Item Description
1 *Three 5.25-inch, half-height bays for 3 Two internal 3.5-inch, one-third height
optional drives and media card bay for hard drives)
reader.
2 **One standard 3.5-inch, one-third
height bay (1.44-MB diskette drive
shown)*
*The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The bottom bay supports a
drive that is no more than 6.7 inches in depth, including the cables that attach to the back of the drive. Do
not try to force a larger drive into the bottom bay as it could damage the drive and the system board.
**Depending on the computer configuration, you may have a bezel blank in this position. If you do not
have a drive in this slot, you may choose to install a 3.5-inch device (such as a diskette drive, hard drive, or
media card reader).

To verify the type and size of the storage device installed in the computer, run Computer Setup.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–19


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.13.2 Hard Drive


CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:
Ä■ If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, shut down the operating system properly, then turn off
the computer. Do not remove a hard drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.
■ Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more
information about preventing electrostatic damage.
■ Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
■ Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
■ Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.

1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).


2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
4. Disconnect the power 1 and data 2 cables from the back of the drive.

✎ The right-angle data cable must be used for this chassis model when installing hard drives in the
3.5-inch bays to prevent cable damage from overflexing.

6–20 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

5. Pull up on the green hard drive drivelock mechanism 1 for that drive and slide the drive
from the drive bay 2 .

6. Remove the four guide screws (two on each side) from the old drive and install them in the
replacement drive.

✎ Extra guide screws are provided on the chassis. Hard drives use 6-32 standard screws. Optical
drives use M3 metric screws. The HP-supplied metric screws are black. The HP-supplied
standard screws used on hard drives are silver.

7. Store the removed drive in anti-static packaging.


8. Install the new drive by sliding it into the appropriate drive bay on the front of the chassis.
The drivelock automatically secures the drive in the bay.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–21


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.13.3 Optical Drive

✎ An optical drive is a CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, DVD-ROM, DVD-R/RW, or CD-RW/DVD Combo


drive.

1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).


2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).

✎ Ifbezel
you are adding a drive in a bay that was previously empty, you must remove the corresponding
blank from the front bezel.

4. Disconnect the power and data cables on the back of the drive.

CAUTION: When removing cables, pull the tab or connector instead of the cable itself to prevent
Ä damaging the cable.

5. If the computer is in the desktop mode, continue with step 7.


If the computer is in the minitower mode, continue with step 8.
6. In the desktop mode, press down on the yellow drivelock mechanism 1 and slide the drive
from the drive bay 2.

6–22 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

7. In the minitower mode, pull up on the green drivelock mechanism 1 for that specific drive
and slide the drive from the drive bay 2.

8. Remove the four guide screws (two on each side) from the old drive and install them in the
lower set of holes on the optical drive.

✎ Extra guide screws are provided on the chassis on the side of the fourth drive bay. Optical drives
use M3 metric screws. The HP-supplied metric screws are black. The HP-supplied standard
screws, used only for hard drives, are silver.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–23


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

9. After installing the M3 metric guide screws 1, install the drive by sliding it into the
appropriate drive bay on the front of the chassis 2. The drivelock automatically secures the
drive in the bay.

CAUTION: Make sure the guide screws line up with the guide slots in the drive cage. The use of
Ä unnecessary force when installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.

10. When installing an optical drive, the default audio solution is digital audio. No separate
audio cable is required for Windows XP applications.
11. Connect the data and power cables on the to the drive.

✎ Refer to Chapter 4, “Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features” for information on
attaching the cabling to get optimum performance.

12. Replace the front bezel (Section 6.6).


13. Replace the computer access panel (Section 6.5)
14. If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and
enable the Smart Cover Sensor (Section 6.2).

6–24 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.13.4 Diskette Drive


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
4. Pull up on the green hard drive drivelock mechanism 1 and slide the drive from the bay 2.

5. Remove the four guide screws (two on each side) from the old drive and install them in the
replacement drive. Install four guide screws, two on each side of the drive.

✎ Extra guide screws are provided on the side of the drive bay under the access panel. The diskette
drive uses M3 metric screws. The HP-supplied metric screws are black. The HP-supplied
standard screws, used only for hard drives, are silver.

6. Insert the diskette drive into the bay from the front of the chassis. Push it in until it locks into
place.

CAUTION: Make sure the guide screws line up with the guide slots in the drive cage. The use of
Ä unnecesary force when installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.

7. Connect the data and power cables to the drive.


8. Replace the front bezel (Section 6.6).
9. Replace the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
10. If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and
enable the Smart Cover Sensor (Section 6.2).

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–25


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.14 Front I/O Device


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
4. Disconnect the two I/O device cables from the system board: the front USB cable pair and
the front audio cable.
5. Remove the two screws that secure the front I/O device to the mounting bracket 1.
6. Remove the two screws that secure the mounting bracket to the chassis 2.
7. Lift the mounting bracket off the chassis 3.

8. Carefully pull the cables from the front of the chassis making sure that they do not snag on
the lower drive cage.
To reinstall the I/O device:
1. Thread the cables through the opening and down the space in front of the lower drive cage.
This step may be easier if you thread a single cable at a time through the opening.

CAUTION: Be careful when threading the cables in the chassis so the cable ends are not damaged.
Ä
2. Position the I/O device and the mounting bracket on the front of the chassis and install the
two screws that secure the bracket to the chassis.
3. Install the two screws that secure the I/O device to the mounting bracket.
Complete the reassembly by reinstalling the other parts that had been removed.

6–26 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.15 Power Switch Assembly


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
4. Disconnect the power switch/LED cable from the system board.
5. Squeeze the switch holder retaining clips together at the front of the chassis 1 and pull the
switch assembly out of the chassis 2.

To install the power switch assembly, reverse the removal procedure.

✎ When installing the power switch cable it may be necessary to disconnect a data cabe from one
of the drives to make it easier to grab the free end of the cable.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–27


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.16 System Board


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove all PCI expansion boards (Section 6.10).
4. Remove the x16 PCI Express graphics card (Section 6.10).
5. Disconnect all cables connected to the system board, noting their location for reinstallation.
6. Compress the system board tray handle 1 to release the latch and slide the system board
tray towards the front of the computer 2 to free it from the back of the chassis.

To install the system board with its tray, press down on the board to ensure it is latching 1, then
push the board into its locked position 2.

6–28 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.17 Battery
The 3-volt lithium coin cell battery that comes with this computer provides power to the
real-time clock and has a lifetime of about three years. When replacing the battery, use a battery
equivalent to the battery originally installed on the computer.

✎ The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC wall
socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.

WARNING: This computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of fire and
Å burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:
■ Do not attempt to recharge the battery.
■ Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60°C (140°F).
■ Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or
water.
■ Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.

CAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings. When
Ä the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10)
Utility Guide for information on backing up the CMOS settings.

Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general
N household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public
collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional
Ä equipment. Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by
briefly touching a grounded metal object.

1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).


2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).

✎ It may be necessary to remove an expansion card to gain access to the battery.


3. Locate the battery and battery holder on the system board.
4. Depending on the type of battery holder on your system board, complete the following
instructions to replace the battery:

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–29


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.17.1 Type 1 Battery Holder


1. Lift the battery out of its holder.

2. Slide the replacement battery into position, positive side up.


3. The battery holder automatically secures the battery in the proper position.
4. Replace the computer access panel.
5. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
6. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.

6–30 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.17.2 Type 2 Battery Holder


1. To release the battery from its holder, squeeze the metal clamp 1 that extends above one
edge of the battery. When the battery pops up, lift it out.
2. To insert the new battery, slide one edge of the replacement battery under the holder’s lip
with the positive side up 2. Push the other edge down until the clamp snaps over the other
edge of the battery.

3. Replace the computer access panel.


4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–31


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.17.3 Type 3 Battery Holder


1. Pull back on the clip 1 that holds the battery in place, then remove the battery 2.
2. Insert the new battery and position the clip back in place.

3. Replace the computer access panel.


4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.

6–32 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.18 Heatsink
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Disconnect the heatsink control cable from the system board.
4. Uncrew the four captive screws 1 that secure the heatsink to the system board.

CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
Ä even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.

5. Remove the heatsink 2 from atop the processor.

When reinstalling the heatsink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe
and fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.

CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
Ä evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–33


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.19 Processor
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Disconnect the heatsink control cable from the system board and remove the heatsink
(Section 6.18).
4. Rotate the locking lever to its full open position 1.
5. Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position 2.
6. Carefully lift the processor from the socket 3.

CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and handling
Ä them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to replace the
system board.

CAUTION: The heatsink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage
Ä to the processor’s solder connections.

To install a new processor:


1. Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.
2. Secure the locking lever.
If reusing the existing heatsink, go to step 3.
If using a new heatsink, go to step 5.
3. If reusing the existing heatsink, apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top
of the processor.
4. Clean the bottom of the heatsink with the provided alcohol pad and place it atop the
processor.
5. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and
place it in position atop the processor.

6–34 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws and
attach the heatsink control cable to the system board.

CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
Ä evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.

✎ After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to ensure
that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can be
found on the Web at: http:\\h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.

6.20 Speaker
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Disconnect the speaker wire from the system board.
4. Remove the four screws from the inside of the chassis 1 that secure the speaker to the
chassis.
5. Remove the speaker 2.

To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–35


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.21 Chassis Fan


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Disconnect the fan control cable from the system board.
4. Remove the four screws that secure the fan assembly to the chassis and then remove the fan
assembly.

To install the fan assembly, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow out of
the unit. Refer to the air flow arrows on the side of the fan housing for proper air flow orientation.

6–36 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.22 Power Supply


WARNING: Voltage is always present on the system board when the computer is plugged into an
Å active AC outlet. To avoid possible personal injury and damage to the equipment the power cord should
be disconnected from the computer and/or the AC outlet before opening the computer.

1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).


1. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
2. Disconnect all power cables from the mass storage devices and from the system board.
3. Remove the four screws that connect the power supply to the chassis 1 and slide the chassis
forward 2 until it is stopped by the retaining clips.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–37


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

4. With the power supply stopped by the retaining clips 1, lift the power supply to raise it over
the clips then slide the power supply forward 2 to remove it from the computer.

To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.

6–38 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.23 Changing from Desktop to Minitower


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
4. Disconnect all power and data cables from the back of the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
5. To release the drives from the 5.25-inch drive bay, press down on the short yellow drivelock
as shown. While pressing the drivelock, pull the drives out of the drive bay.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–39


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6. Before you reinstall each drive into the chassis, turn it so that it is in the same orientation as
the internal 3.5-inch drive. The bottom of the drive should be parallel to the yellow drivelock.

7. Slide the drive into the uppermost available bay until it snaps into place. When the drive is
properly inserted, the drivelock will secure it. Repeat this step for each drive.

CAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The bottom
Ä bay supports a drive that is no more than 17 cm (6.7 inches) in depth, including the cables that attach to
the back of the drive. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This
could cause damage to the drive and the system board.

The use of unnecessary force when installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the
drive.

8. Reconnect all power and data cables to the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
9. Remove the bezel subpanel (Section 6.7).

CAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when you pull it away from the front bezel. Pulling the subpanel
Ä away at an angle could damage the pins that align it within the front bezel.

10. Reposition the bezel blanks within the subpanel in the proper orientation for the minitower
configuration.

6–40 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

11. Reposition the subpanel (rotate it 90°) with the logo at the bottom, then snap it back into the
bezel.

12. Replace the front bezel and computer access panel.


13. Reconnect the external equipment.
14. If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and
enable the Smart Cover Sensor.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–41


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6.24 Changing from Minitower to Desktop


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
4. Disconnect all power and data cables from the back of the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
5. To release the drives from the 5.25-inch drive bay, lift the release tab on the green latch drive
bracket for the drive. While lifting the release tab, slide the drive from its drive bay. Repeat
this step for each 5.25-inch drive.

6–42 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

6. Before reinstalling each drive into the chassis, turn the drive so that it is perpendicular to the
internal 3.5-inch drive. The drive should be parallel to the green latch drive bracket.

7. Slide the drive into the uppermost available bay until it snaps into place. When the drive is
properly inserted, the drivelock will secure it. Repeat this step for each drive.

CAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The bottom
Ä bay supports a drive that is no more than 17 cm (6.7 inches) in depth, including the cables that attach to
the back of the drive. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive, into the bottom bay. This
could cause damage to the drive and the system board.

The use of unnecessary force when installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the
drive.

8. Reconnect all power and data cables to the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
9. Remove the bezel subpanel (Section 6.7).

CAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when you pull it away from the front bezel. Pulling the subpanel
Ä away at an angle could damage the pins that align it within the front bezel.

10. Reposition the bezel blanks within the subpanel in the proper orientation for the desktop
configuration.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 6–43


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis

11. Reposition the subpanel (rotate it 90°) with the logo at the bottom, then snap it back into the
bezel.

12. Replace the front bezel and computer access panel.


13. Reconnect the external equipment.
14. If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and
enable the Smart Cover Sensor.

6–44 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


7
Removal and Replacement Procedures—
Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper
service. After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics
utility to verify that all components operate properly.

✎ Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
7.1 Preparation for Disassembly
See Chapter 5, “Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation,”for initial
safety procedures.
1. Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer (Section 7.2,
“Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock,” and Section 7.4, “External Security Devices”).
2. Close any open software applications.
3. Exit the operating system.
4. Remove any diskette or compact disc from the computer.
5. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
Ä
CAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as
Ä the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be disconnected
before servicing a unit.

6. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.

✎ During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing. Keep all
screws with the units removed.

CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the wrong
Ä screw in an application may damage the unit.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–1


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.2 Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock


If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock use Computer Setup to unlock the lock. Refer to the
Desktop Management Guide on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for more information
about the Smart Cover Lock.
If you cannot access Computer Setup to unlock the cover you will need to remove the locking
solenoid by using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key (Spare part number 166527-001 or
166527-002). Once the solenoid has been deactivated or removed the access panel can be
removed.
The Smart Cover FailSafe Key will be needed in any of the following circumstances:
■ Power outage
■ Startup failure
■ Processor or power supply failure
■ Lost password
To open the computer cover with the Smart Cover Lock engaged:
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key, remove the tamper-proof screw 1 that secures the
Smart Cover Lock to the inside of the chassis.
3. Push the metal arm that wraps around the air vent grid up and back 2 to free the Smart Cover
Lock from the chassis.

4. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).

7–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

To reattach the Smart Cover Lock:


1. Install the Smart Cover Lock assembly on the inside of the rear panel with the metal arm 1
wrapped around the air vent grid on the back of the chassis.
2. Use the supplied tamper-resistant screw 2 to secure the Smart Cover Lock to the chassis.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–3


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.3 Hood Sensor


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly.
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the special security clip (Section 7.4.1) from the top corner of the power supply
cage.
4. Raise the power supply to its full upright position.
5. Disconnect the hood sensor cable from the system board.
6. Slide the hood sensor switch mounted on the power supply towards the outside of the
computer 1 and lower it through the slot 2.

To install the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedure.

7–4 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.4 External Security Devices


7.4.1 Security Clip
A special clip is required to secure the computer from intrusion. This clip must be installed
before installing the computer cover.

7.4.2 Cable Lock


The cable lock may be used to secure the computer cover to the chassis and, at the same time,
secure the computer to a fixed object.
Insert the cable lock in the location shown below.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–5


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.4.3 Padlock
A padlock may be used by itself to secure the computer cover to the computer chassis. A padlock
may also be used with a security cable to secure the computer to a fixed object.
I

7–6 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.5 Computer Cover


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).

CAUTION: Before removing the computer cover, ensure that the computer is turned off and that the
Ä power cord is disconnected from the electrical outlet.

1. Press the buttons on the left and right sides of the computer 1.
2. Slide the computer cover towards the front of the computer until it stops 2, then lift it up and
off the chassis.

To install the computer cover, reverse the removal procedure.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–7


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.6 Front Drive Bezels


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the drive bezel by pushing the top tab on the right side of the larger front bezel as
shown 1 and rotating the drive bezel away from the larger front bezel 2.

✎ The drive bezel will vary depending on the computer configuration.

4. Install a bezel or a bezel blank by pushing the bezel into place.

7–8 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

There are three drive bezel inserts that are available.

Item Description

1 Diskette drive bezel

2 Hard drive bezel

3 3.5” drive bezel

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–9


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.7 Cable Management


The Small Form Factor chassis is a very compact computer and proper routing of the internal
cables is critical to the operation of the computer. Follow good cable management practices when
working inside the computer.
■ Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heatsink.
■ Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like
these are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.
■ Keep cables clear of movable or rotating parts like the power supply and drive cage to
prevent them from being cut or crimped when the component is lowered into its normal
position.
■ When folding a flat ribbon cable, never fold to a sharp crease. Sharp creases may damage the
wires.
■ Some flat ribbon cables come prefolded. Never change the folds on these cables.
■ Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.
■ Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
■ Never crease a SATA data cable.
■ Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push
cables down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.
When removing the power supply power cables from the P1 connector on the system board,
always follow these steps:
1. Squeeze on the top of the retaining latch attached to the cable end of the connector 1.
2. Grasp the cable end of the connector and pull it straight up 2.

CAUTION: Always pull the connector - NEVER pull on the cable. Pulling on the cable could damage the
Ä cable and result in a failed power supply.

7–10 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.7.1 Cable Connections


System board connectors are color-coded to make it easier to find the proper connection.
Cable To Cable Designator
Power Supply System board, 24-pin P1
Power Supply Diskette drive P2
Power Supply CPU power, 6-pin P3
Power Supply 1st SATA Hard drive P4
Power Supply 2nd SATA Hard drive P5
Power Supply Optical drive P7
Cable To PCA Designator
Diskette drive System board P10, FLOPPY (Black)
1st SATA Hard drive System board P60, SATA 0 (Dark Blue)
2nd SATA Hard drive if no System board P61, SATA 1 (White)
ODD/1st ODD
2nd SATA Hard drive if ODD System board P62, SATA 2 (Light blue)
present
Serial port A System board P54, COM A
Serial port B System board P52, COM B
Hood lock solenoid System board P124, HLCK
Heatsink fan System board P8, CPU FAN
Hood Sensor System board P125, HSENSE
Front power button/LED System board P5, Pb/LED
Front I/O USB System board P24, FRNT USB (Yellow)
Speaker System board P6, SPKR
Front audio System board P23, FRTNT AUD, (Blue)
Chassis fan System board P9, CH FAN

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–11


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.8 Memory
CAUTION: The memory module sockets have gold metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
Ä important to use memory modules with gold metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or oxidation
resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards.
Ä Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching
a grounded metal object. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more information.

CAUTION: When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so
Ä may damage the module.

1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock
(Section 7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).

WARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to
Å cool before touching.

4. Open both latches of the memory module socket 1, and insert the memory module into the
socket 2. Refer to Appendix F, “Memory” for the correct sequence for installing memory
modules to get optimal performance.

✎ Aonmemory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with the tab
the memory socket.

5. Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and
properly seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position 3.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for any additional modules that you want to install.

7–12 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

✎ The computer automatically recognizes the additional memory when the computer is turned on.
To reassemble the computer, reverse the removal procedure.

✎ IftheyouSmart
normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and enable
Cover Sensor.

7.9 Vertically Oriented Expansion Card


7.9.1 Expansion Card Retainer
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, restart the computer and enter Computer Setup to
unlock the lock.
2. Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external
devices.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
4. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
5. Release the slot cover retention latch that secures the PCI slot covers by lifting the green tab
on the latch and rotating the latch to the full open position 1.
6. Remove the single screw that keeps the card retainer in place 2 and slide the retainer to the
left to remove it from the chassis 3.

To install the card retainer, reverse the removal procedure.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–13


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.9.2 PCI Expansion Card


1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, restart the computer and enter Computer Setup to
unlock the lock.
2. Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external
devices.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
4. Remove the computer cover. (Section 7.5).
5. Identify the slot into which you want to insert the expansion card.
6. Release the slot cover retention latch that secures the PCI slot covers by lifting the green tab
on the latch and rotating the latch to the full open position 1.
7. Remove the slot cover by sliding it up and out of the computer 2.

7–14 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

8. Install the expansion card by sliding the card under the slot cover retention latch then
pressing the card down into the slot on the system board.

✎ Be sure not to scrape other components in the chassis when installing an expansion card.

9. Rotate the slot cover retention latch back in place to secure the expansion card.

✎ When you install an expansion card, make sure the metal bracket on the card slides into the slot
on the back of the computer then press down firmly on the card so that the whole connector seats
properly in the expansion card slot.

CAUTION: All expansion card slots on the rear of the computer must contain either an expansion card
Ä or slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–15


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.9.3 PCI Express Expansion Card


To remove a PCI Express expansion card:
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, restart the computer and enter Computer Setup to
unlock the lock.
2. Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external
devices.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
4. Remove the computer cover. (Section 7.5).
5. Release the slot cover retention latch on the back of the computer that secures the PCI slot
covers by lifting the green tab on the latch and rotating the latch to the open position.
6. Pull the retention arm on the back of the PCI Express expansion socket away from the card
(on x16 card socket only) and carefully rock the card back and forth until the connectors pull
free from the socket. Pull the expansion card straight up from the socket then away from the
inside of the chassis. Be sure not to scrape the card against the other components.

7. If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the
open slot.
8. Rotate the slot cover retention latch back in place to secure the expansion cards and
expansion slot covers.

CAUTION: All expansion card slots on the rear of the computer must contain either an expansion card
Ä or slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.

7–16 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.10 PCI Riser Card Assembly and Backwall


1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock
(Section 7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
4. Remove all PCI and PCI Express expansion cards from the PCI expansion slots
(Section 7.9).
5. Rotate the optical and diskette drive cage to its upright position.

6. Remove the security clip (Section 7.4.1), rotate the power supply to its full upright
position 1, then lift the power supply straight up and out of the chassis 2.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–17


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7. Remove the SmartCover lock from the backwall of the chassis using the special security
wrench and disconnect its cable from the system board. (Section 7.2)

8. Disconnect the data and power cables from the system board.

9. Disconnect the “Serial A” cable from the system board, remove the two screws that secure
the serial connector to the backwall, then remove the serial connector.

10. Remove the fan shroud by lifting it up and out (Section 7.12).
11. Remove the chassis fan (Section 7.18)

7–18 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

12. Remove the long mounting screw that secures the system board tray to the chassis.

13. Slide the system board tray assembly towards the front of the chassis about 6 cm (1/4 inch)
and lift the system board up and out of the chassis.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–19


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

14. Remove the three screws that secure the backwall assembly to the chassis 1, then slide the
backwall assembly a few millimeters/inches toward the space vacated by the power supply
and lift out(2.

15. Slide the new backwall onto the rear chassis 1. Secure it with the three screws removed from
the old backwall 2.

7–20 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

16. Install the serial connector into the new backwall using the two screws that were removed
from the serial connector in a previous step. Reconnect the “Serial A” cable to the system
board.

17. Install the system board tray assembly. Be sure the keyhole slot on the system board sits
properly over the locking pins. When the system board is in position, replace the long
mounting screw to secure the system board to the chassis.
18. Install the chassis fan and connect the control cable to the system board.
19. Reconnect all power and data cables to the system board. Be sure to use proper cable
handling and placement precautions.
20. Install the power supply. Rotate it to its normal operating position. Be sure to use proper
cable handling and placement precautions.
21. Install the full-height PCI expansion card in the available slot in the new PCI riser card cage
assembly.
22. Install the new PCI riser card cage assembly on the new backwall by aligning the cage with
the guide rails on the backwall. Press down firmly on the cage to secure it in place on the
backwall. Be sure the riser card in the cage is properly seated in the PCI expansion slot on
the system board.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–21


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

23. Rotate the drive cage back down to its normal position. Be sure to use proper cable handling
and placement precautions.

CAUTION: Cables are very sensitive. Overbending, creasing, or pinching can damage cables.
Ä
24. Replace the fan shroud on top of the fan.
25. Replace the computer cover.

7.11 Drives
A Torx T-15 screwdriver is needed to remove and install the guide screws on a drive.

CAUTION: Make sure personal files on the hard drive are backed up to an external storage device
Ä before removing the hard drive. Failure to do so will result in data loss. After replacing the primary hard
drive, you will need to run the Restore Plus! CD to load the HP factory-installed files.

7.11.1 Drive Positions

Drive Positions
Item Description Item Description
1 3.5-inch, internal, standard hard 3 3.5-inch drive bay (1.44-MB diskette
drive bay drive shown)*
2 5.25-inch drive bay for optional
drives
*A 3.5-inch diskette drive, hard drive, or media card reader may be installed in this bay but the
correct bezel must be installed to ensure proper air flow.

To verify the type and size of the storage device installed in the computer, run Computer Setup.

7–22 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.11.2 Optical Drive


CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of the drives before removing the drive from the
Ä computer.

✎ An optical drive is a CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, DVD-ROM, DVD+R/RW, or CD-RW/DVD Combo


drive.

1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock (Section
7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
4. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position by pulling on the green-tabbed lip.

5. Disconnect the power and data cables from the rear of the optical drive.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–23


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

6. Rotate the drive cage down to its normal position before trying to remove the drive.
7. Press the green drive retainer latch and slide the drive forward and lift it from the drive cage.

8. When replacing the drive, transfer the four screws from the old drive to the new one. The
screws take the place of drive rails.

CAUTION: Use only 5-mm long screws as guide screws. Longer screws can damage the internal
Ä components of the drive.

7–24 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.11.3 External 3.5-inch Drive


1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock (Section
7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
4. Remove the optical drive (Section 7.11.2).
5. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position by pulling on the green-tabbed lip.
6. Disconnect the signal 1 and power 2 cables from the drive. The other end of the cables
should remain connected to the system board. (Diskette drive is shown.)

7. Rotate the drive cage down to its normal position before trying to remove the drive.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–25


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

8. Press the green drive retention latch 1 located on the side of the diskette drive to disengage
the drive from the drive cage and slide the diskette drive forward approximately 6mm
(1/4 inch) 2.

9. Lift the rear of the drive up so that the rear guide screws clear the top of the drive cage 1.
As the drive rises it automatically slides forward until it is free from the drive cage 2.

To replace the drive, reverse the removal procedure making sure you rotate the rear of the drive
down, pivoting on the front screws.

✎ When replacing the drive, transfer the four metric screws from the old drive to the new one. The
screws take the place of drive rails.

7–26 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.11.4 Primary Hard Drive


A Torx T-15 screwdriver is needed to remove and install the guide screws on a hard drive.

CAUTION: Make sure personal files on the hard drive are backed up to an external storage device
Ä before removing the hard drive. Failure to do so will result in data loss. After replacing the primary hard
drive, you will need to run the Restore Plus! CD to load the HP factory-installed files.

CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:


Ä■ If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, shut down the operating system properly, then turn off
the computer. Do not remove a hard drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.
■ Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more
information about preventing electrostatic damage.
■ Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
■ Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
■ Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.

1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock
(Section 7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
4. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position by pulling on the green-tabbed lip.

✎ It is not necessary to remove the drives from the drive cage.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–27


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

5. Remove the security clip that secures the backwall to the power supply.

6. Rotate the power supply to its full upright position.

7–28 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the hard drive.

8. Pull the tab that locks the drive in place away from the drive 1, slide the hard drive toward
the front of the computer, then lift it up and out of the bay 2.

To install a hard drive, reverse the above procedure.

✎ The replacement hard drive kit includes several data cables. Make sure to use the cable that is
exactly the same as the factory-installed cable.

✎ Ifconnector
the system has only one SATA hard drive, the data cable must be connected to the dark blue
labeled SATA0 first to avoid any hard drive performance problems.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–29


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

✎ When replacing the hard drive, transfer the four screws from the old drive to the new one. The
screws take the place of drive rails. You will need a Torx T-15 screwdriver to remove and
re-install the guide screws. HP has provided four extra 6-32 standard guide screws on the front of
the chassis, under the computer cover. The 6-32 standard guide screws are silver and are used
only for the hard drive.

✎ system,
If you replaced the primary hard drive, insert the Restore Plus! CD to restore the operating
software drivers, and any software applications that were preinstalled on the computer.
Follow the instructions in the guide included with the Restore Plus! CD. When the restore
process has completed, reinstall any personal files that you backed up before replacing the hard
drive.

7.12 Fan Shroud


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Lift up on the fan shroud 1, rotate the rear of the shroud up 2 (pivoting on its top front lip)
and out of the chassis 3.

When replacing the shroud, make sure that it does not get caught on the wires from either the fan
or the speaker.

7–30 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.13 Front I/O Devices


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the two screws that secure the front I/O device to the chassis 1.
4. Rotate the drive cage to its full upright position.
5. Disconnect the front I/O cable from the system board.
6. Push the front I/O device into the chassis 2 and snake the cable through the tunnel 3 to
remove the device from the chassis.

To reinstall the front I/O device, reverse the removal procedure.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–31


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.14 Heatsink
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the fan shroud (Section 7.12).
4. Disconnect the fan control cable from the system board.
5. Loosen the four captive screws that secure the heatsink to the system board tray.

CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
Ä even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.

6. Lift the heatsink from atop the processor and set it on its side to keep from contaminating the
work area with thermal grease.

When reinstalling the heatsink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe
and fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.

CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
Ä evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.

CAUTION: Failure to install the fan shroud may cause the computer to overheat.
Ä

7–32 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.15 Processor
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the fan shroud (Section 7.12).
4. Disconnect the heatsink control cable from the system board and remove the heatsink
(Section 7.14).
5. Rotate the locking lever to its full open position 1.
6. Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position 2.
7. Carefully lift the processor from the socket 3.

CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and handling
Ä them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to replace the
system board.

CAUTION: The heatsink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage
Ä to the processor’s solder connections.

To install a new processor:


1. Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.
2. Secure the locking lever.
If reusing the existing heatsink, go to step 3.
If using a new heatsink, go to step 6.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–33


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

3. If reusing the existing heatsink, clean the bottom of the heatsink with the alcohol pad
provided in the spares kit.

CAUTION: Before reinstalling the heatsink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom of the
Ä heatsink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply thermal
grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares kit.

4. Apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor and install the
heatsink atop the processor.
5. Go to step 7.
6. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and
place it in position atop the processor.
7. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws and
attach the heatsink control cable to the system board.

CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
Ä evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.

✎ After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to ensure
that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can be
found on the Web at: http:\\h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.

7–34 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.16 Speaker
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the fan shroud (Section 7.12).
4. Remove any memory modules that might interfere with the screwdriver used for removing
the speaker.
5. Disconnect the speaker wire from the system board.
6. Remove the two screws that secure the speaker to the chassis 1.
7. Rotate the top of the speaker back to clear the lip on the top of the chassis, then lift the
speaker up and out of the chassis 2.

To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–35


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.17 Power Supply


WARNING: Voltage is always present on the system board when the computer is plugged into an
Å active AC outlet. To avoid possible personal injury and damage to the equipment the power cord should
be disconnected from the computer and/or the AC outlet before opening the computer.

1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).


2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the security clip.

4. Rotate the drive cage up and disconnect the power cables from all of the drives.
5. Disconnect the power cables from the system board.
6. Release the power supply cable from the cable retaining clips on the bottom of the chassis
under the drive cage.
7. Disconnect the hood sensor from the system board and remove the sensor from the power
supply if required (Section 7.3).

7–36 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

8. Rotate the power supply to its full upright position 1, then lift the power supply straight up
and out of the chassis 2.

To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.

CAUTION: When installing the power supply cables, make sure they are properly positioned so they
Ä are not cut by the drive cage and are not pinched by the rotating power supply.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–37


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.18 Chassis Fan


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the fan shroud (Section 7.12).
4. Disconnect the chassis fan cable from the system board.
5. Remove the four screws that secure the fan to the chassis, then remove the fan from the
chassis.

To install the chassis fan, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow into the
unit. The molded grille on the chassis fan should face the inside of the chassis.

7–38 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.19 System Board


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove all PCI and PCI Express expansion boards (Section 7.9).
4. Remove the fan shroud from the chassis (Section 7.11).
5. Remove the chassis fan from the chassis (Section 7.18)
6. Rotate the drive cage to its full upright position.
7. Remove the security clip (Section 7.4.1) and rotate the power supply to its full upright
position.
8. Disconnect all data and power cables from the system board.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–39


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

9. Disconnect the serial port from the system board.

10. Disconnect the balance of the cables from the system board.
11. Remove the long mounting screw that secures the system board tray to the chassis.

7–40 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

12. Slide the system board tray assembly towards the front of the chassis, about 6 mm (1/4 inch)
and lift the system board up and out of the chassis.

13. Remove the heatsink from the system board and the system board tray (Section 7.14).
To install the system board, reverse the removal procedure.

✎ The heatsink should be installed on the system board before the system board is reinstalled in the
chassis.

CAUTION: Before reinstalling the heatsink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom of the
Ä heatsink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply thermal
grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares kit.

✎ When reinstalling the system board it is important to secure the system board and tray to the
chassis with the long retaining screw before performing any subsequent steps.

CAUTION: When reconnecting the cables it is important that they be positioned so they do not interfere
Ä with the rotation of the drive cage or power supply.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–41


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.20 Drive Clutch Components


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the optical drive and any other drive in the rotating drive cage (Section 7.11.2 and
Section 7.11.3).
4. Remove the chassis fan (Section 7.18).
5. Remove the system board (Section 7.19).
6. Remove the five screws that secure the clutch base to the chassis.

7. Hold the drive cage in the up position while removing the clutch base from the floor of the
chassis.

CAUTION: When moving the clutch base be careful not to damage the wires that are threaded through
Ä it.

7–42 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

8. Hold the drive cage in the upright position while removing the two screws that secure the
clutch finger assembly to the drive cage.

✎ The clutch finger assembly doe not have to be removed to remove the power switch.

To replace the drive clutch components, reverse the removal procedure.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–43


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.21 Power Switch Assembly


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove all drives from the rotating drive cage (Section 7.11.2 and Section 7.11.3).
4. Remove the chassis fan (Section 7.18).
5. Remove the system board (Section 7.19).
6. Remove the drive ckutch base (Section 7.20).
7. Disconnect the power switch/LED cable from the system board.
8. Squeeze the switch holder retaining clips together at the front of the chassis 1 and push the
switch assembly out of the chassis 2. Push the two LEDs out of the chassis 3.
9. If necessary, the LED holders may also be removed by squeezing the clips and pushing them
out of the front of the chassis.

To install the power switch and LEDs, reverse the removal procedure.

7–44 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.22 Battery
The battery that comes with this computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a
lifetime of about three years. When replacing the battery, use a battery equivalent to the battery
originally installed on the computer. The computer comes with a 3-volt lithium coin cell battery.

✎ The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC wall
socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.

WARNING: This computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of fire and
Å burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:
■ Do not attempt to recharge the battery.
■ Do not expose to temperatures higher than 140°F (60°C).
■ Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or
water.
■ Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.

CAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings. When
Ä the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10)
Utility Guide for information on backing up the CMOS settings.

Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general
N household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public
collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional
Ä equipment. Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by
briefly touching a grounded metal object.

1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).


2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 7.5).

✎ It may be necessary to remove an expansion card to gain access to the battery.


3. Locate the battery and battery holder on the system board.
4. Carefully pull the cable bundle out of the way to access the battery.
5. Depending on the type of battery holder on your system board, complete the following
instructions to replace the battery:

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–45


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.22.1 Type 1 Battery Holder


1. Lift the battery out of its holder.

2. Slide the replacement battery into position, positive side up.


3. The battery holder automatically secures the battery in the proper position.
4. Replace the computer access panel.
5. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
6. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.

7–46 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.22.2 Type 2 Battery Holder


1. To release the battery from its holder, squeeze the metal clamp that extends above one edge
of the battery. When the battery pops up, lift it out 1.
2. To insert the new battery, slide one edge of the replacement battery under the holder’s lip
with the positive side up 2. Push the other edge down until the clamp snaps over the other
edge of the battery.

3. Replace the computer access panel.


4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 7–47


Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis

7.22.3 Type 3 Battery Holder


1. Pull back on the clip 1 that holds the battery in place, then remove the battery 2.
2. Insert the new battery and position the clip back in place.

3. Replace the computer access panel.


4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.

7–48 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


8
Removal and Replacement Procedures -
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper
service. After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the diagnostics
utility to verify that all components operate properly.

✎ Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
8.1 Preparation for Disassembly
See Chapter 5, “Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation” for initial
procedures.
1. Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer (Section 8.2,
“External Security Devices”).
2. Close any open software applications.
3. Exit the operating system.
4. Remove any compact disc from the computer.
5. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
Ä
CAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as
Ä the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be disconnected
before servicing a unit.

6. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.

✎ During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing. Keep all
screws with the units removed.

CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the wrong
Ä screw in an application may damage the unit.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–1


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8. If the PC is mounted in the accessory mounting stand, loosen the thumbscrew that secures
the computer to the stand 1.
9. Slide the computer forward until it is disengaged from the hooks on the front of the tower
stand, then lift the computer off the stand 2 and lay the computer down on its rubber feet.

8–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.2 External Security Devices


8.2.1 Installing a Cable Lock
The cable lock may be used to secure the computer access panel to the chassis and, at the same
time, secure the computer to a fixed object.

8.2.2 Installing a Padlock


A padlock may be used by itself to secure the access panel to the computer chassis. A padlock
may also be used with a security cable to secure the computer to a fixed object.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–3


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.3 Computer Access Panel


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).

CAUTION: Before removing the computer access panel, ensure that the computer is turned off and that
Ä the power cord is disconnected from the electrical outlet.

2. Lay the computer down so the rubber feet rest on a solid surface.
3. Loosen the captive thumbscrew 1 that secures the access panel to the computer chassis.
4. Slide the top access panel back about 1.3 cm, (1/2 inch), then lift it off the unit 2.

To install the access panel, reverse the removal procedure.

8–4 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.4 Optical Drive


CAUTION: The flat ribbon cable at the back of the optical drive must be disconnected before either the
Ä front panel assembly or the optical drive are removed. Failure to remove the cable will result in destroying
the cable.

1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).


2. Remove the access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Push the release latch on the side of the optical drive towards the outside of the computer 1
and slide the drive out of the computer through the front bezel 2.

4. Disconnect the flat ribbon cable from the back of the optical drive.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–5


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

Before the new optical drive can be used, the release latch must be attached.
1. Peel the backing off the adhesive on the release latch.
2. Without allowing the release latch to touch the optical drive, carefully align the holes on the
release latch with the pins on the side of the optical drive. Make sure the release latch is
oriented properly.
3. Insert the pin at the front of the optical drive into the hole at the end of the release latch 1,
and press firmly.

4. Insert the second pin 2, and press the entire release latch firmly to fasten the latch securely
to the optical drive.
To install the optical drive, reverse the removal steps.

8–6 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.5 Front Panel Assembly


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Lift up on the two green locking levers on the left and right sides of the chassis. This will
unlatch the front panel assembly and push it about 1.3 cm (1/2 inch) out of the chassis. The
assembly will automatically stop at that distance.
4. Disconnect the fan and speaker cables from the system board.

5. Lift the left lever again 1 and pull the front panel assembly straight out of the chassis 2.

To reinstall the front panel assembly, reverse the removal procedure.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–7


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.6 Front Bezel


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the optical drive (Section 8.4).
4. Disconnect the fan and speaker cables from the system board.
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.5).
6. Use a #0 Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws that secure the front bezel to the
front panel assembly 1.
7. Release the catch 2 that keeps the top of the bezel in place.
8. Pull the front bezel away from the assembly 3.

To reinstall the front bezel, reverse the removal procedures.

8–8 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.7 Chassis Fan


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the optical drive (Section 8.4).
4. Disconnect the fan and speaker cables from the system board.
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.5).
6. Remove the four screws that secure the chassis fan to the housing 1.
7. Remove the fan 2.
To install the fan assembly, reverse the removal procedures, making sure that the fan cable is
located near the top of the assembly nearest the center of the front panel assembly.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–9


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.8 Speaker
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the optical drive (Section 8.4).
4. Disconnect the fan and speaker cables from the system board.
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.5).
6. Remove the two screws 1 that secure the speaker to the front panel then remove the
speaker 2.

To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedure.

8–10 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.9 Cable Management


Always follow good cable management practices when working inside the computer.
■ Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heatsink.
■ Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like
these are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.
■ Keep cables clear of sliding or moveable parts to prevent their being cut or crimped when the
parts are moved.
■ Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.
■ Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
■ Never crease a SATA data cable.
■ Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push
cables down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.
When removing the power supply power cables from the P1 or P3 connectors on the system
board, always follow these steps:
1. Squeeze on the top of the retaining latch attached to the cable end of the connector 1.
2. Grasp the cable end of the connector and pull it straight up 2.

CAUTION: Always pull the connector - NEVER pull on the cable. Pulling on the cable could damage the
Ä cable and result in a failed power supply.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–11


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.9.1 Cable Connections


All cable connectors on the system board are color-coded for ease of installation.
System Board Connections

System Board Connector Description

Optical data/power P21, SECONDARY

Heatsink fan P8, CPU FAN

Chassis fan P9, CH FAN

Front LED/Power button P5, PB/LED, (black)

Front I/O USB P24, FRNT USB, (yellow)

Front I/O audio P23, FRNT AUD, (blue)

Speaker P6, SPKR

Serial port A P54, COM A

Parallel connector P126, PAR

Hood sensor P125, HSENSE

SATA hard drive P60, SATA0, (dark blue)

Power Supply Connections

Connector ID Description

P1 Main power

P2 Hard drive

P3 CPU power

8–12 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.10 Memory
CAUTION: The memory module sockets have gold metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
Ä important to use memory modules with gold metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or oxidation
resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards.
Ä Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching
a grounded metal object. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more information.

CAUTION: When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so
Ä may damage the module.

1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).


2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).

WARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to
Å cool before touching.

✎ You many need to remove the expansion card cage if it has a full-height card installed.
3. Open both latches of the memory module socket 1, and insert the memory module into the
socket 2. If you are replacing a memory module, place it in the socket vacated by its
predecessor. Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted
and properly seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position 3.

✎ Aonmemory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with the tab
the memory socket.

4. Repeat step 3 for any additional modules that you want to install.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–13


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

✎ The computer automatically recognizes the additional memory when the computer is turned on.
To reassemble the computer, reverse the removal procedure.

8.11 Expansion Card Cage


The computer supports two different expansion card cages:
■ a PCI Express card cage that will support a full-height, full-length PCI Express X16 card
■ a standard PCI card cage that will support a full-height, 6.60-in. long PCI card
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Rotate the bail handle on the expansion card cage 1 and lift the cage straight up 2.
A PCI Express card cage is illustrated.

To install the cage, align the cage in the guides on the chassis and press it firmly into place.

8–14 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.12 Expansion Card


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the expansion card cage (Section 8.11).
4. Open the latch 1 by squeezing the retainer fingers together and rotate the latch out of the
way 2.
If removing a standard PCI card continue with step 5.
If removing a PCI Express card go to step 7.
5. For a standard PCI expansion card, lay the card cage on its edge and hold it firmly in place.
Grasp the card and carefully rock it back and forth until the connectors pull free from the
card cage. Pull the expansion card straight out 3 to remove it from the cage. Be sure not to
scrape the card against the cage.

Store the removed card in anti-static packaging.

6. If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the
open slot and continue with step 8.
If you are installing a new expansion card, continue with step 8.

CAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or expansion slot
Ä cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–15


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

7. For a PCI Express expansion card, lay the card cage on its edge and hold it firmly in place.
Pull the retention arm on the back if the PCI Express expansion socket away from the card
and carefully rock it back and forth until the connectors pull free from the card cage. Pull the
expansion card straight out (3) to remove it from the cage. Be sure not to scrape the card
against the cage.

8. Slide the bracket on the end of the expansion card down into the slot and press the card
firmly into the socket.

✎ When you install an expansion card, make sure you press firmly on the card so that the whole
connector seats properly in the expansion card socket on the riser board.

9. Close the latch firmly to secure the card in place.


10. Install the expansion card cage into the computer.
11. Reconfigure the computer, if necessary. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on
the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for instructions about using Computer Setup.

8–16 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.13 Expansion Card Retaining Latch


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the expansion card cage (Section 8.11).
4. Open the latch 1 by squeezing the retainer fingers together, then rotate the latch out of the
way 2.
5. Use a thin, flat-blade screwdriver to pry the damaged locking lever off the expansion card
cage 3.
6. Remove the locking lever.

To install the replacement locking lever, spread the pivot pin area and push it onto the ear of the
expansion card cage so the pins snap into their receptacles.
Complete the assembly by locking the expansion card in place and reinstalling the expansion
card cage.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–17


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.14 Hard Drive


A Torx T-15 screwdriver is needed to remove and install the guide screws on a hard drive.

CAUTION: Make sure personal files on the hard drive are backed up to an external storage device
Ä before removing the hard drive. Failure to do so will result in data loss. After replacing the primary hard
drive, you will need to run the Restore Plus! CD to load the HP factory-installed files.

CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:


Ä■ If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, shut down the operating system properly, then turn off
the computer. Do not remove a hard drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.
■ Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more
information about preventing electrostatic damage.
■ Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
■ Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
■ Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.

1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).


2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).

WARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to
Å cool before touching.

3. Remove the optical drive (Section 8.4).


4. Disconnect the three front I/O, fan, and speaker cables from the system board.
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.5).
6. Disconnect the power and data cables from the hard drive.

8–18 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

7. Pull the drive release lever away from the hard drive 1, then lift the cable-end of the drive
up 2 and pull it towards the center of the chassis 3 to remove it from the drive cage.

Follow proper cable management techniques when handling all cables (Section 8.9).
8. Remove the four guide screws (two on each side) from the old drive. You will need these
screws to install a new drive.

9. Store the removed drive in anti-static packaging.


To install a drive, reverse the removal procedure.

CAUTION: When installing the hard drive, ensure that cable are not cut or pinched.
Ä

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–19


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.15 Front I/O Device


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the optical drive (Section 8.4).
4. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.5).
5. Disconnect the three front I/O, fan, and speaker cables from the system board.
6. Remove the hard drive (Section 8.14).
7. Remove the two screws that hold the front I/O device in place 1.
8. Remove the I/O device assembly from the chassis to access the audio cable.
9. Disconnect the audio cable from the system board and pull that cable through the tunnel
opening in the chassis.
10. Disconnect the remaining I/O cables from the system board.

To install the front I/O device, follow this sequence:


1. Thread the audio cable through the tunnel in the chassis and attach it to the front I/O board.
2. Attach the front USB cable and the power switch/LED cable to the front I/O board.
3. Attach the front I/O board to the chassis with two screws.
4. Plug the cables into the system board.

✎ All cables are color coded to match their connectors on the front I/O board and are keyed to
prevent improper connections.

8–20 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.16 Heatsink Assembly


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the optical drive (Section 8.4).
4. Disconnect the three front I/O, fan, and speaker cables from the system board.
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.5).
6. Disconnect the heatsink fan cable from the system board.
7. Unscrew the four screws that secure the heatsink to the system board, then lift the heatsink
with the shroud from the system board.

CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
Ä even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.

8. Lay the heatsink on its top in a safe area to prevent the thermal grease from contaminating
the work surface.

If resuing the existing heatsink go to step 1.


If uisng a new heatsink, go to step 3.
1. If reusing the existing heatsink, clean bottom of the heatsink and apply the thermal grease
provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor.
2. Position the heatsink atop the processor
3. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and
place it in position atop the processor.
4. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws and
attach the heatsink control cable and the thermal sensor cable to the system board.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–21


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
Ä evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.

8.17 Processor
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the optical drive (Section 8.4).
4. Disconnect the three front I/O, fan, and speaker cables from the system board.
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.5).
6. Remove the heatsink (Section 8.16).
7. Rotate the processor locking lever to its full open position 1.
8. Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position 2.
9. Carefully lift the processor from the socket 3.

CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and handling
Ä them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to replace the
system board.

CAUTION: The heatsink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage
Ä to the processor’s solder connections.

To install a new processor:


1. Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.
2. Secure the locking lever.
If reusing the existing heatsink, go to step 3.
If using a new heatsink, go to step 5.

8–22 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

3. If reusing the existing heatsink, clean bottom of the heatsink and apply the thermal grease
provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor.
4. Position the heatsink atop the processor.
5. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and
place it in position atop the processor.
6. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws and
attach the heatsink control cable to the system board.

CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
Ä evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.

✎ After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to ensure
that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can be
found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–23


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.18 Power Supply


WARNING: Voltage is always present on the system board when the computer is plugged into an
Å active AC outlet. To avoid possible personal injury and damage to the equipment, the power cord should
be disconnected from the computer and/or the AC outlet before opening the computer.

1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).


2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the optical drive (Section 8.4).
4. Disconnect the power supply cable from the hard drive and the 6-pin power supply cable on
the system board alongside the heatsink.
5. Slide the power supply towards the front of the chassis 1 about 1.3 cm (1/2 inch) then slide
it towards the center of the chassis and rotate it up 2 to access the main cable connection
beneath it.
6. Disconnect the power cable from the system board.

✎ There are slots on the chassis that match with clips on the bottom of the power supply for positive
retention.

7. Remove the power supply from the chassis.

To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the power supply engages
the clips on the chassis when sliding it into place.

✎ When installing the power supply make sure the cables are routed properly and do not interfere
with the access panel installation.

8–24 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.19 System Board


1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the optical drive (Section 8.4).
4. Disconnect the three front I/O, fan, and speaker cables from the system board.
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.5).
6. Remove the memory modules (Section 8.10).
7. Remove the expansion card cage (Section 8.11).
8. Remove the hard drive (Section 8.14).
9. Remove the heatsink (Section 8.16).
10. Remove the power supply (Section 8.18).
11. Disconnect all cables connected to the system board, noting their location for reinstallation.
12. Remove the thumbscrew that secures the system board to the chassis 1.
13. Slide the system board towards the front of the chassis 2, making sure that all keyhole
retainers are clear before lifting the system board from the chassis.

CAUTION: Be very careful when removing or replacing the system board to prevent damaging it.
Ä

To install the system board, reverse the removal procedure.

✎ When installing the system board make sure that the board is pressed firmly against the floor of
the chassis to allow the keys to lock into the keyhole slots on the system board.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–25


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.20 Battery
The battery that comes with this computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a
lifetime of about three years. When replacing the battery, use a battery equivalent to the battery
originally installed on the computer. The computer comes with a 3-volt lithium coin cell battery.

✎ The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC wall
socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.

WARNING: This computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of fire and
Å burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:
■ Do not attempt to recharge the battery.
■ Do not expose to temperatures higher than 140°F (60°C).
■ Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or
water.
■ Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.

CAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings. When
Ä the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10)
Utility Guide for information on backing up the CMOS settings.

Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general
N household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public
collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional
Ä equipment. Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by
briefly touching a grounded metal object.

1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).


2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove athe optical drive (Section 8.4).
4. Disconnect the three front I/O, fan, and speaker cables from the system board.
5. Remove the power supply to access the battery (Section 8.18).
6. Depending on the type of battery holder on the system board, complete the following
instructions to replace the battery:

8–26 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.20.1 Type 1 Battery Holder


1. Lift the battery out of its holder.

2. Slide the replacement battery into position, positive side up.


3. The battery holder automatically secures the battery in the proper position.
4. After the battery has been replaced, reverse the disassembly procedure.
5. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
6. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–27


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.20.2 Type 2 Battery Holder


1. To release the battery from its holder, squeeze the metal clamp 1 that extends above one
edge of the battery. When the battery pops up, lift it out.
2. To insert the new battery, slide one edge of the replacement battery under the holder’s lip
with the positive side up 2. Push the other edge down until the clamp snaps over the other
edge of the battery.

3. After the battery has been replaced, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.

8–28 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8.20.3 Type 3 Battery Holder


1. Pull back on the clip 1 that holds the battery in place, then remove the battery 2.
2. Insert the new battery and position the clip back in place.

3. After the battery has been replaced, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 8–29


Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis

8–30 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


A
Connector Pin Assignments

This appendix contains the pin assignments for many computer and workstation connectors.
Some of these connectors may not be used on the product being serviced.

Keyboard
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1 Data
2 Unused
3 Ground
4 +5 VDC
5 Clock
6 Unused

Mouse
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1 Data
2 Unused
3 Ground
4 +5 VDC
5 Clock
6 Unused

Ethernet BNC
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1 (Center) Data
2 (Shield) Ground

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 A–1


Connector Pin Assignments

Ethernet RJ-45
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1 (+) Transmit Data
2 (-) Transmit Data
3 (+) Receive Data
4 Unused
5 Unused
6 (-) Receive Data
7 Unused
8 Unused

Ethernet AUI

Connector and Icon

Pin Signal Pin Signal


1 Ground 9 Positive AUI Differential Receive
2 Negative AUI Differential Collision 10 +12V
3 Positive AUI Differential Collision 11 Ground
4 Negative AUI Differential Transmit 12 Ground
5 Positive AUI Differential Transmit 13 Unused
6 Ground 14 Unused
7 Ground 15 Unused
8 Negative AUI Differential Receive 16 Unused

Parallel Interface

Connector and Icon

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal


1 Strobe 7 Data Bit 5 13 Select
2 Data Bit 0 8 Data Bit 6 14 Auto Linefeed
3 Data Bit 1 9 Data Bit 7 15 Error
4 Data Bit 2 10 Acknowledge 16 Initialize Printer
5 Data Bit 3 11 Busy 17 Select IN
6 Data Bit 4 12 Paper End 18-25 Signal Ground

A–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Connector Pin Assignments

Serial Interface, Powered and Non-Powered


Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1 Carrier Detect (12V if powered)
2 Receive Data
3 Transmit Data
4 Data Terminal Ready
5 Signal Ground
6 Data Set Ready
7 Request to Send
8 Clear to Send
9 Ring Indicator (5V if powered)

USB
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1 +5 VDC
2 - Data
3 + Data
4 Ground

Microphone
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone) Pin Signal
1 (Tip) Audio_left
1 2 3
2 (Ring) Power_Right
3 (Shield) Ground

Headphone
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone) Pin Signal
1 (Tip) Audio_Left
1 2 3
2 (Ring) Audio_Right
3 (Shield) Ground

Line-In Audio
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone) Pin Signal
1 (Tip) Audio_In_Left
1 2 3
2 (Ring) Audio_In_Right
3 (Shield) Ground

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 A–3


Connector Pin Assignments

Line-Out Audio
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone) Pin Signal
1 (Tip) Audio_Out_Left
1 2 3
2 (Ring) Audio_Out_Right
3 (Shield) Ground

External Infrared Transceiver


Connector and Icon

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal


1 Transmit 4 5V 7 Not Used
2 Receive 5 Mode 8 Not Used
3 Ground 6 Not Used

Monitor
Connector and Icon

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal


1 Red Analog 6 Ground 11 Not used
2 Green Analog 7 Ground 12 DDC Serial Data
3 Blue Analog 8 Ground 13 Horizontal Sync
4 Not used 9 +5V (fused) 14 Vertical Sync
5 Ground 10 Ground 15 DDC Serial Clock

A–4 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Connector Pin Assignments

ATA/ATAPI (IDE) Standard Drive Cable


Connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal


1 Reset 15 DD1 29 DMAK
2 Ground 16 DD14 30 Ground
3 DD7 17 DD0 31 INTRQ
4 DD8 18 DD15 32 IOCS16
5 DD6 19 Ground 33 DA1
6 DD9 20 (Key) 34 PDIAG (cable detect)
7 DD5 21 DMARQ 35 DA0
8 DD10 22 Ground 36 DA2
9 DD4 23 DIOW 37 CS1FX
10 DD11 24 Ground 38 CS3FX
11 DD3 25 DIOR 39 DASP
12 DD12 26 Ground 40 Ground
13 DD2 27 IORDY
14 DD13 28 CSEL

CD-ROM 50-Pin Connector


Connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal


1 Audio L-ch 14 DD12 27 IORDY 40 +5V
2 Audio R-ch 15 DD3 28 DMACK- 41 +5V
3 Audio GND 16 DD13 29 INTRQ 42 +5V
4 GND 17 DD2 30 IOCS16- 43 GND
5 RESET- 18 DD14 31 DA1 44 GND

6 DD8 19 DD1 32 PDIAG- 45 GND


7 DD7 20 DD15 33 DAO 46 GND
8 DD9 21 DD0 34 DA2 47 CSEL
9 DD6 22 DMARQ 35 CS1FX- 48 GND
10 DD10 23 GND 36 CS3FX- 49 Vendor-specific
11 DD5 24 DIOR- 37 DASP- 50 Vendor-specific
12 DD11 25 DIOW- 38 +5V
13 DD4 26 GND 39 +5V

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 A–5


Connector Pin Assignments

24-Pin Power (CMT and MT models)


Connector

24 13

12 1

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal


1 +3.3 V 7 GND 13 +3.3 V 19 GND
2 +3.3 V 8 POK 14 -12 V 20 open
3 GND 9 +5 Vaux 15 GND 21 +5 V
4 +5 V 10 +12 V 16 PSON 22 +5 V
5 GND 11 +12 V 17 GND 23 +5 V
6 +5 V 12 +3.3 V 18 GND 24 GND

24-Pin MicroFit Power (USDT, SFF, and ST models)


Connector

24 13

12 1

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal


1 +5 Vaux 7 PWRGD 13 +12 V 19 GND
2 GND 8 +3.3 V 14 +5 V Sense 20 +3.3 Sense
3 +5 V 9 +3.3 V 15 GND 21 +3.3 V
4 +5 V 10 Tach 16 +5 V 22 +3.3 V
5 PS_ON 11 GND 17 +5 V 23 GND
6 GND 12 Fan-CMD 18 +3.3 V 24 -12 V

4-Pin Power (for CPU) (MT and CMT models)


Connector and Icon Pin CMT and MT Signal
1 GND
2 GND
3 +12 V CPU
4 -12 V CPU

A–6 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Connector Pin Assignments

6-Pin Power (for CPU) (USDT, SFF, and ST models)


Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1 GND
2 GND
3 GND
4 6 4 12 V CPU
5 12 V CPU
6 +12 V

SATA Data and Power


Drive Connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal


S1 Ground S2 A+ S3 A- S4 Ground
S5 B- S6 B+ S7 Ground
P1 V 3.3 P2 V 3.3 P3 V 3.3 P4 Ground
P5 Ground P6 Ground P7 V5 P8 V5
P9 V5 P10 Ground P11 Reserved P12 Ground
P13 V 12 P14 V 12 P15 V 12
*S = Data, P = Power

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 A–7


Connector Pin Assignments

PCI Express
x1, x4, x8, and x16 PCI Express Connector

Pin A
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 PRSNT1# 6 JTAG3 11 PERST# 16 PERp0 21 PERp1
2 +12V 7 JTAG4 12 GND 17 PERn0 22 PERn1
3 +12V 8 JTAG5 13 REFCLK+ 18 GND 23 GND
4 GND 9 +3.3v 14 REFCLK- 19 RSVD 24 GND
5 JTAG2 10 +3.3v 15 GND 20 GND 25 PERp2
26 PERn(2) 31 GND 36 PERn4 41 GND 46 GND
27 GND 32 RSVD 37 GND 42 GND 47 PERp7
28 GND 33 RSVD 38 GND 43 PERp6 48 PERn7
29 PERp3 34 GND 39 PERp5 44 PERn6 49 GND
30 PERn3 35 PERp4 40 PERn5 45 GND 50 RSVD

51 GND 56 PERp9 61 PERn10 66 GND 71 GND


52 PERp8 57 PERn9 62 GND 67 GND 72 PERp13
53 PERn8 58 GND 63 GND 68 PERp12 73 PERn13
54 GND 59 GND 64 PERp11 69 PERn12 74 GND
55 GND 60 PERp10 65 PERn11 70 GND 75 GND

76 PERp14 81 PERn15
77 PERn14 82 GND
78 GND
79 GND
80 PERp15
Pin B information is on the next page
Notes:
x1 PCI Express uses pins 1-18
x4 PCI Express uses pins 1-32
x8 PCI Express uses pins 1-49
x16 PCI Express uses pins 1-8

A–8 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Connector Pin Assignments

PCI Express
x1, x4, x8, and x16 PCI Express Connector

Pin B
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 +12V 6 SMDAT 11 WAKE# 16 GND 21 GND
2 +12V 7 GND 12 RSVD 17 PRSNT2# 22 GND
3 RSVD 8 +3.3v 13 GND 18 GND 23 PETp2
4 GND 9 JTAG1 14 PETp0 19 PETp1 24 PETn2
5 SMCLK 10 3.3vAux 15 PETn0 20 PETn1 25 GND
26 GND 31 PRSNT2# 36 GND 41 PETp6 46 PETn7
27 PETp3 32 GND 37 PETp5 42 PRTn6 47 GND
28 PETn3 33 PETp4 38 PETn5 43 GND 48 PRSNT2#
29 GND 34 PETn4 39 GND 44 GND 49 GND
30 RSVD 35 GND 40 GND 45 PETp7 50 PETp8

51 PETn8 56 GND 61 GND 66 PETp12 71 PETn13


52 GND 57 GND 62 PETp11 67 PETn12 72 GND
53 GND 58 PETp10 63 PETn11 68 GND 73 GND
54 PETp9 59 PETn10 64 GND 69 GND 74 PETp14
55 PETn9 60 GND 65 GND 70 PETp13 75 PETn14
76 GND 81 PRSNT2#
77 GND 82 RSVD
78 PETp15
79 PETn15
80 GND
Notes:
x1 PCI Express uses pins 1-18
x4 PCI Express uses pins 1-32
x8 PCI Express uses pins 1-49
x16 PCI Express uses pins 1-82

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 A–9


Connector Pin Assignments

DVI Connector
Connector and Icon

Pin Signal Pin Signal


1 T.M.D.S. Data2- 13 T.M.D.S. Data3+
2 T.M.D.S. Data2+ 14 +5V Power
3 T.M.D.S. Data2/4 Shield 15 Ground (for +5V)
4 T.M.D.S. Data4- 16 Hot Plug Detect
5 T.M.D.S. Data4+ 17 T.M.D.S. Data0-
6 DDC Clock 18 T.M.D.S. Data0+
7 DDC Data 19 T.M.D.S. Data0/5 Shield
8 No Connect 20 T.M.D.S. Data5-
9 T.M.D.S. Data1- 21 T.M.D.S. Data5+
10 T.M.D.S. Data1+ 22 T.M.D.S. Data Shield
11 T.M.D.S. Data1/3 Shield 23 T.M.D.S. Clock+
12 T.M.D.S. Data3- 24 T.M.D.S. Clock-

A–10 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


B
Power Cord Set Requirements

The power supplies on some computers have external power switches. The voltage select switch
feature on the computer permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-120 or 220-240
volts AC. Power supplies on those computers that do not have external power switches are
equipped with internal switches that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the
proper voltage.
The power cord set received with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country
where you purchased the equipment.
Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you
use the computer.

General Requirements
The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:
1. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for
evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed.
2. The power cord set must have a minimum current capacity of 10A (7A Japan only) and a
nominal voltage rating of 125 or 250 volts AC, as required by each country’s power system.
3. The diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG, and the length of the
cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet).
The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items
placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and
the point where the cord exits from the product.

WARNING: Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is
Å damaged in any manner, replace it immediately.

Japanese Power Cord Requirements


For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product.

CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products.
Ä

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 B–1


Power Cord Set Requirements

Country-Specific Requirements
Additional requirements specific to a country are shown in parentheses and explained below.
Accrediting Accrediting
Country Agency Country Agency
Australia (1) EANSW Italy (1) IMQ
Austria (1) OVE Japan (3) METI
Belgium (1) CEBC Norway (1) NEMKO
Canada (2) CSA Sweden (1) SEMKO
Denmark (1) DEMKO Switzerland (1) SEV
Finland (1) SETI United Kingdom (1) BSI
France (1) UTE United States (2) UL
Germany (1) VDE
1. The flexible cord must be <HAR> Type HO5VV-F, 3-conductor, 0.75mm2 conductor size.
Power cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall plug) must bear the certification mark of
the agency responsible for evaluation in the country where it will be used.
2. The flexible cord must be Type SVT or equivalent, No. 18 AWG, 3-conductor. The wall plug
must be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15A, 125V) or NEMA 6-15P (15A,
250V) configuration.
3. Appliance coupler, flexible cord, and wall plug must bear a “T” mark and registration
number in accordance with the Japanese Dentori Law. Flexible cord must be Type VCT or
VCTF, 3-conductor, 0.75 mm2 conductor size. Wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type
with a Japanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7A, 125V) configuration.

B–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


C
POST Error Messages

POST Error Messages


An error message results if the Power-On Self-Test (POST) encounters a problem. This test runs
when the system is turned on, checking assemblies within the computer and reporting any errors
found.
Not all computers use all of the codes listed.
POST Error Messages
Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
101-Option ROM System ROM or 1. Verify the correct ROM.
Checksum Error expansion board option 2. Flash the ROM if needed.
ROM checksum.
3. If an expansion card was recently
added, remove it and see if the
problem remains.
4. Clear CMOS.
5. If the message disappears, there
may be a problem with the
expansion card.
6. Replace the system board.
103-System Board DMA or timers. 1. Clear CMOS.
Failure 2. Remove expansion boards.
3. Replace the system board.
110-Out of Memory Recently added PCI 1. If a PCI expansion card was recently
Space for Option expansion card contains added, remove it to see if the
ROMs an option ROM too large problem remains.
to download during 2. In Computer Setup, set Advanced
POST. > Device Options > NIC PXE
Option ROM Download to
Disable to prevent PXE option ROM
for the internal NIC from being
downloaded during POST to free
more memory for an expansion
card’s option ROM. Internal PXE
option ROM is used for booting from
the NIC to a PXE server.
3. Ensure that the ACPI/USB Buffers @
Top of Memory setting in Computer
Setup is enabled.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 C–1


POST Error Messages

POST Error Messages (Continued)


Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
162-System Options Not Configuration incorrect. Run Computer Setup and check
Set RTC (real-time clock) configuration in Advanced >
battery may need to be Onboard Devices.
replaced. Reset the date and time under Control
Panel. If the problem persists, replace
the RTC battery.
163-Time & Date Not Invalid time or date in Reset the date and time under Control
Set configuration memory. Panel (Computer Setup can also be
RTC (real-time clock) used). If the problem persists, replace the
battery may need to be RTC battery.
replaced.
CMOS jumper may not Check for proper placement of the
be properly installed. CMOS jumper, if applicable.
164-Memory Size Error Memory amount has Press the F1 key to save the memory
changed since the last changes.
boot (memory added or
removed).
Memory configuration is 1. Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup) or
incorrect. Windows utilities.
2. Make sure memory module(s) are
installed properly.
3. If third party memory has been
added, test using HP-only memory.
4. Verify proper memory module type.
201-Memory Error RAM failure. 1. Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup) or
Windows utilities.
2. Ensure memory modules are
installed correctly.
3. Verify proper memory module type.
4. Remove and replace the identified
faulty memory module(s).
5. If the error persists after replacing
memory modules, replace the system
board.
213-Incompatible A memory module in 1. Verify proper memory module type.
memory Module in memory socket identified 2. Try another memory socket.
memory Socket(s) in the error message is
X,X, X missing critical SPD 3. Replace memory with a module
information, or is conforming to the SPD standard.
incompatible with the
chipset.
214-DIMM Populated DIMM Rearrange the DIMMS so that each
Configuration Warning configuration is not channel has the same amount of
optimized. memory.

C–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


POST Error Messages

POST Error Messages (Continued)


Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
219-ECC Memory Recently added memory 1. If additional memory was recently
Module Detected. ECC module(s) support ECC added, remove it to see if the
Modules not supported memory error correction. problem remains.
on this platform 2. Check product documentation for
memory support information.
301-Keyboard Error Keyboard failure. 1. Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
2. Check connector for bent or missing
pins.
3. Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
4. Replace keyboard.
303-Keyboard I/O board keyboard 1. Reconnect keyboard with computer
Controller Error controller. turned off.
2. Replace the system board.
304-Keyboard or Keyboard failure. 1. Reconnect the keyboard with
System Unit Error computer turned off.
2. Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
3. Replace keyboard.
4. Replace system board.
404-Parallel Port Both external and internal 1. Remove any parallel port expansion
Address Conflict ports are assigned to cards.
Detected parallel port X. 2. Clear CMOS.
3. Reconfigure card resources and/or
run Computer Setup.
410-Audio Interrupt IRQ address conflicts with Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
Conflict another device. in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
411-Network Interface IRQ address conflicts with Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
Card Interrupt Conflict another device. in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
501-Display Adapter Graphics display 1. Reseat the graphics card (if
Failure controller. applicable).
2. Clear CMOS.
3. Verify that the monitor is attached
and turned on.
4. Replace the graphics card (if
applicable).
510-Flash Screen image Flash Screen image has Reflash the system ROM with the latest
corrupted errors. BIOS image

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 C–3


POST Error Messages

POST Error Messages (Continued)


Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
511-CPU, CPUA, or CPU fan is not connected 1. Reseat the CPU fan.
CPUB Fan not detected or may have 2. Reseat fan cable.
malfunctioned.
3. Replace the CPU fan.
512-Chassis, rear Chassis, rear chassis, or 1. Reseat chassis, rear chassis, or front
chassis, or front chassis front chassis fan is not chassis fan.
fan not detected connected or may have 2. Reseat fan cable.
malfunctioned.
3. Replace chassis, rear chassis, or
front chassis fan.
514-CPU or Chassis Fan CPU or chassis fan is not 1. Reseat CPU or chassis fan.
not detected. connected or may have 2. Reseat fan cable.
malfunctioned.
3. Replace CPU or chassis fan.
601-Diskette Controller Diskette controller 1. Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup).
Error circuitry or floppy drive 2. Check and/or replace cables.
circuitry incorrect.
3. Clear CMOS.
4. Replace diskette drive.
5. Replace the system board.
605-Diskette Drive Type Mismatch in drive type. 1. Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup).
Error 2. Disconnect any other diskette
controller devices (tape drives).
3. Clear CMOS.
610-External Storage External tape drive not Reinstall tape drive or press F1 and
Device Failure connected. allow system to reconfigure without the
drive.
611-Primary Floppy Port Configuration error. Run Computer Setup and check the
Address Assignment configuration in Advanced >
Conflict Onboard Devices.
660-Display cache is Integrated graphics Replace system board if minimal
detected unreliable controller display cache graphics degrading is an issue.
is not working properly
and will be disabled.
912-Computer Cover Computer cover was No action required.
Has Been Removed removed since the last
Since Last System Start system startup.
Up
917-Front Audio not Front audio harness has Reconnect or replace front audio
Connected been detached or harness.
unseated from the system
board.

C–4 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


POST Error Messages

POST Error Messages (Continued)


Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
918-Front USB Not Front USB harness has Reconnect or replace front USB harness.
Connected been detached or
unseated from system
board.
921-Device in PCI There is an Try rebooting the system. If the error
Express slot failed to incompatibility/problem reoccurs, the device may not work with
initialize. with this device and the this system.
system or PCI Express Link
could not be retrained to
an x1.
1151-Serial Port A Both external and internal 1. Remove any serial port expansion
Address Conflict serial ports are assigned cards.
Detected to COM1. 2. Clear CMOS.
3. Reconfigure card resources and/or
run Computer Setup or Windows
utilities.
1152-Serial Port B Both external and internal 1. Remove any serial port expansion
Address Conflict serial ports are assigned cards.
Detected to COM2. 2. Clear CMOS.
3. Reconfigure card resources and/or
run Computer Setup or Windows
utilities.
1155-Serial Port Address Both external and internal 1. Remove any serial port expansion
Conflict Detected serial ports are assigned cards.
to same IRQ. 2. Clear CMOS.
3. Reconfigure card resources and/or
run Computer Setup or Windows
utilities.
1201-System Audio Device IRQ address Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
Address Conflict conflicts with another in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
Detected device.
1202-MIDI Port Address Device IRQ address Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
Conflict Detected conflicts with another in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
device.
1203-Game Port Device IRQ address Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
Address Conflict conflicts with another in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
Detected device.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 C–5


POST Error Messages

POST Error Messages (Continued)


Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
1720-SMART Hard Hard drive is about to 1. Determine if hard drive is giving
Drive Detects Imminent fail. (Some hard drives correct error message. Enter
Failure have a firmware patch Computer Setup and run the Drive
that will fix an erroneous Protection System test under
error message.) Storage > DPS Self-test.
2. Apply firmware patch if applicable
(available at www.hp.com/support).
3. Back up contents and replace hard
drive.
1796-SATA Cabling One or more SATA Ensure SATA connectors are used in
Error devices are improperly ascending order. For one device, use
attached. For optimal SATA 0. For two devices, use SATA 0
performance, the SATA 0 and SATA 1. For three devices, use SATA
and SATA 1 connectors 0, SATA1, and SATA 2.
must be used before
SATA 2 and SATA 3.
1797-SATA Drivelock is Drivelock is enabled on Either remove the Drivelocked SATA
not supported in RAID one or more SATA hard device or disable the Drivelock feature.
mode. drives, and they cannot To disable the Drivelock feature, enter
be accessed while the Computer Setup, change Storage >
system is configured for Storage Options > SATA
RAID mode. Emulation to IDE, and select File >
Save Changes and Exit. Reenter
Computer Setup and select Security >
Drivelock. For each listed
Drivelock-capable SATA device, ensure
Drivelock is Disabled. Lastly, change
Storage > Storage Options >
SATA Emulation back to RAID and
select File > Save Changes and
Exit.
1801-Microcode Patch Processor not supported 1. Upgrade BIOS to proper version.
Error by ROM BIOS. 2. Change the processor.
2200-PMM Allocation Memory error during
1. Reboot the computer.
Error during MEBx POST execution of the
Download Management Engine 2. Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
(ME) BIOS Extensions memory modules, and reboot the
option ROM computer.
3. If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the
computer, restore the original
memory configuration, and reboot
the computer.
4. If the error persists, replace the
system board.

C–6 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


POST Error Messages

POST Error Messages (Continued)


Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
2201-MEBx Module did Memory error during
1. Reboot the computer.
not checksum correctly POST execution of the
Management Engine 2. Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
(ME) BIOS Extensions memory modules, and reboot the
option ROM computer.
3. If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the power
cord, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the
computer.
4. If the error persists, replace the
system board.
2202-PMM Memory error during
1. Reboot the computer.
Deallocation Error POST execution of the
during MEBx cleanup Management Engine 2. Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
(ME) BIOS Extensions memory modules, and reboot the
option ROM computer.
3. If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the power
cord, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the
computer.
4. If the error persists, replace the
system board.
2203-Setup error MEBx selection or exit
1. Reboot the computer.
during MEBx execution resulted in a setup failure.
2. Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3. If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the power
cord, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the
computer.
4. If the error persists, replace the
system board.
2204-Inventory error BIOS information passed
1. Reboot the computer.
during MEBx execution to the MEBx resulted in a
failure. 2. If the error persists, update to the
latest BIOS version.
3. If the error still persists, replace the
system board.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 C–7


POST Error Messages

POST Error Messages (Continued)


Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
2205-Interface error MEBx operation 1. Reboot the computer.
during MEBx execution experienced a hardware 2. If the error persists, update to the
error during latest BIOS version.
communication with ME.
3. If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
Invalid Electronic Serial Electronic serial number 1. Run Computer Setup. If Setup
Number. has become corrupted. already has data in the field or will
not allow the serial number to be
entered, download from
http://www.hp.com and run
SP5572.EXE (SNZERO.EXE).
2. Run Computer Setup and try to enter
serial number under Security, System
ID, then save changes.
Network Server Mode Keyboard failure while 1. Reconnect keyboard with computer
Active and No Network Server Mode turned off.
Keyboard Attached enabled. 2. Check connector for bent or missing
pins.
3. Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
4. Replace keyboard.
Parity Check 2 Parity RAM failure. Run Computer Setup and diagnostic
utilities.
System will not boot CPU fan not installed or 1. Remove the computer cover, press
without fan. disconnected in VSFF the power button, and see if the
chassis. processor fan spins. If not spinning,
make sure the fan cable is plugged
onto the system board header.
Ensure the heatsink is properly
seated and installed.
2. If the fan is plugged in and the
heatsink is properly seated but the
fan does not spin, then replace the
heatsink-fan assembly.

C–8 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


POST Error Messages

POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes


This section covers the front panel LED codes as well as the audible codes that may occur before
or during POST that do not necessarily have an error code or text message associated with them.

WARNING: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to the
Å system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be sure to
disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to cool before
touching.

Look for the LED between the DIMM sockets. If the LED is illuminated, the system still has power. Power off
the computer and remove the power cord before proceeding.

✎ Ifcomputer
you see flashing LEDs on a PS/2 keyboard, look for flashing LEDs on the front panel of the
and refer to the following table to determine the front panel LED codes.

Recommended actions in the following table are listed in the order in which they should be
performed.

No all diagnostic lights and audible codes are available on all models.

POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes


Activity Beeps Possible Cause Recommended Action
Green Power LED None Computer on. None
On.
Green Power LED None Computer in None required. Press any key or move the
flashes every two Suspend to RAM mouse to wake the computer.
seconds. mode (some
models only) or
normal Suspend
mode.
Red Power LED 2 Processor thermal 1. Ensure that the computer air vents are
flashes two times, protection not blocked and the processor cooling
once every activated: fan is running.
second, followed A fan may be 2. Open hood, press power button, and
by a two second blocked or not see if the processor fan spins. If the
pause. Beeps stop turning. processor fan is not spinning, make
after fifth iteration sure the fan's cable is plugged onto
OR
but LEDs continue the system board header.
until problem is The heatsink/fan
solved. assembly is not 3. If fan is plugged in, but is not
properly attached spinning, then replace heatsink-fan
to the processor. assembly.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 C–9


POST Error Messages

POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (Continued)


Activity Beeps Possible Cause Recommended Action
Red Power LED 3 Processor not 1. Check to see that the processor is
flashes three times, installed (not an present.
once every indicator of bad 2. Reseat the processor.
second, followed processor).
by a two second
pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.
Red Power LED 4 Power failure 1. Open the hood and ensure the 4 or
flashes four times, (power supply is 6-wire power supply cable is seated
once every overloaded). into the connector on the system
second, followed board.
by a two second 2. Check if a device is causing the
pause. Beeps stop problem by removing ALL attached
after fifth iteration devices (such as hard, diskette, or
but LEDs continue optical drives, and expansion cards).
until problem is Power on the system. If the system
solved. enters the POST, then power off and
replace one device at a time and
repeat this procedure until failure
occurs. Replace the device that is
causing the failure. Continue adding
devices one at a time to ensure all
devices are functioning properly.
3. Replace the power supply.
4. Replace the system board.
Red Power LED 5 Pre-video memory
flashes five times, error.
Ä Tosystem
avoid damage to the DIMMs or the
board, you must unplug the
computer power cord before
once every attempting to reseat, install, or remove
second, followed a DIMM module.
by a two second 1. Reseat DIMMs.
pause. Beeps stop
2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to
after fifth iteration
isolate the faulty module.
but LEDs continue
until problem is 3. Replace third-party memory with HP
solved. memory.
4. Replace the system board.

C–10 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


POST Error Messages

POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (Continued)


Activity Beeps Possible Cause Recommended Action
Red Power LED 6 Pre-video For systems with a graphics card:
flashes six times, graphics error. 1. Reseat the graphics card.
once every
second, followed 2. Replace the graphics card.
by a two second 3. Replace the system board.
pause. Beeps stop For systems with integrated graphics,
after fifth iteration replace the system board.
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.
Red Power LED 7 System board Replace the system board.
flashes seven failure (ROM
times, once every detected failure
second, followed prior to video).
by a two second
pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.
Red Power LED 8 Invalid ROM 1. Reflash the ROM with the latest BIOS
flashes eight times, based on bad image. See the “Boot Block
once every checksum. Emergency Recovery Mode” section of
second, followed the Desktop Management Guide on
by a two second the Documentation and Diagnostics
pause. Beeps stop CD.
after fifth iteration 2. Replace the system board.
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 C–11


POST Error Messages

POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (Continued)


Activity Beeps Possible Cause Recommended Action
Red Power LED 9 System powers on 1. Check that the voltage selector,
flashes nine times, but is unable to located on the rear of the power
once every boot. supply (some models), is set to the
second, followed appropriate voltage. Proper voltage
by a two second setting depends on your region.
pause. Beeps stop 2. Replace the system board.
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue 3. Replace the processor.
until problem is
solved.
Red Power LED 10 Bad option card. 1. Check each option card by removing
flashes ten times, the card (one at a time if multiple
once every cards), then power on the system to
second, followed see if fault goes away.
by a two second 2. Once a bad card is identified, remove
pause. Beeps stop and replace the bad option card.
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue 3. Replace the system board.
until problem is
solved.

C–12 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


POST Error Messages

POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (Continued)


Activity Beeps Possible Cause Recommended Action
System does not None System unable to Press and hold the power button for less
power on and power on. than 4 seconds. If the hard drive LED turns
LEDs are not green, the power button is working
flashing. correctly. Try the following:
1. Check that the voltage selector (some
models), located on the rear of the
power supply, is set to the appropriate
voltage. Proper voltage setting
depends on your region.
2. Replace the system board.
OR
Press and hold the power button for less
than 4 seconds. If the hard drive LED does
not turn on green then:
1. Check that the unit is plugged into a
working AC outlet.
2. Open hood and check that the power
button harness is properly connected
to the system board.
3. Check that both power supply cables
are properly connected to the system
board.
4. Check to see if the 5 V_aux light on
the system board is turned on. If it is
turned on, then replace the power
button harness.
5. If the 5 V_aux light on the system
board is not turned on, remove the
expansion cards one at a time until
the 5 V_aux light on the system board
turns on. If the problem persists,
replace the power supply.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 C–13


POST Error Messages

C–14 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


D
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Preliminary Checklist
This section describes some simple, preliminary tests and guidelines for troubleshooting the
computer without using the diagnostics.
■ Are the computer and monitor connected to a working electrical outlet?
■ Is the voltage select switch is set to the appropriate voltage for your region (115V or 230V)?
■ Is the computer turned on?
■ Is the green power light illuminated?
■ Is the monitor turned on?
■ Is the green monitor light illuminated?
■ Turn up the monitor brightness and contrast controls if the monitor is dim.
■ If the system has multiple video sources (embedded, PCI, or PCI-Express adapters) installed
(embedded video on some models only) and a single monitor, the monitor must be plugged
into the monitor connector on the source selected as the primary VGA adapter. During boot,
the other monitor connectors are disabled and if the monitor is connected into these ports, the
monitor will not function. You can select which source will be the default VGA source in
Computer (F10) Setup.
■ Press and hold any key. If the system beeps, then the keyboard is operating correctly.
■ Check all cables for loose or incorrect connections.
■ Reconfigure the computer after installing a non–Plug and Play expansion board or other
option, such as a diskette drive.
■ Are all of the necessary device drivers installed?
■ Have all printer drivers been installed for each application?
■ Remove all bootable media (diskette, CD, or USB device) from the system before turning on
the system.
■ Are all switches set correctly?
■ Is the NIC Remote Wakeup cable (featured on some models) connected between the NIC and
the riser/system board?

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–1


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Minor Problems


Solving Minor Problems
Problem Cause Possible Solution
Computer appears Software control of the 1. Press and hold the power button
locked up and will not power switch is not for at least four seconds until the
turn off when the power functional. computer turns off.
button is pressed. 2. Disconnect electrical plug from
outlet.
Computer will not Computer is in Press the power button or press any
respond to USB standby mode. key to resume from standby mode.
keyboard or mouse.
Ä When attempting to resume from
standby mode, do not hold
down the power button for more
than four seconds. Otherwise,
the computer will shut down and
you will lose any unsaved data.
System has locked up. Restart computer.
Computer date and RTC (real-time clock) 1. Reset the date and time under
time display is incorrect. battery may need to be Control Panel. Computer Setup
replaced. can also be used.

✎ Connecting the
computer to a live
2. Replace the RTC battery.

AC outlet prolongs
the life of the RTC
battery.
Computer appears to Network driver is loaded Establish a network connection, or
pause periodically. and no network use Computer Setup or Microsoft
connection is established. Windows Device Manager to disable
the network controller.
Cursor will not move The Num Lock key Press the Num Lock key. The Num
using the arrow keys on may be on. Lock key can be disabled (or
the keypad. enabled) in Computer Setup.
There is no sound or There is no sound or 1. Check the F10 BIOS settings to
sound volume is too sound volume is too low. make sure the internal system
low. speaker is not muted (this setting
does not affect the external
speakers).
2. Make sure the external speakers
are properly connected and
powered on and that the
speakers' volume control is set
correctly.
3. Use the system volume control
available in the operating system
to make sure the speakers are not
muted or to increase the volume.

D–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Minor Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Possible Solution
Cannot remove Smart Cover Lock, 1. Unlock the Smart Cover Lock
computer cover or featured on some using Computer Setup.
access panel. computers, is locked. 2. Use the Smart Cover FailSafe Key
in case of forgotten password,
power loss, or computer
malfunction.
Poor performance is Processor is hot. 1. Ensure airflow to the computer is
experienced. not blocked. Leave a 10.2-cm
(4-inch) clearance on all vented
sides of the computer and above
the monitor to permit the required
airflow.
2. Ensure the fans are connected
and working properly (some fans
only operate when needed).
3. Ensure the processor heatsink is
installed properly.
Hard drive is full. Transfer data from the hard drive to
create more space on the hard drive.
Low on memory. Add more memory.
Hard drive fragmented. Defragment hard drive.
Program previously Restart the computer.
accessed did not release
reserved memory back to
the system
Virus resident of the hard Run virus protection program.
drive.
Too many applications 1. Close unnecessary applications.
running. 2. Add more memory.
Some software 1. Lower the display resolution for
applications, especially the current application or consult
games, are stressful on the the documentation that came with
graphics subsystem. the application for suggestions on
how to improve performance by
adjusting parameters in the
application.
2. Add more memory.
3. Upgrade the graphics solution.
Cause unknown. Restart the computer.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–3


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Minor Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Possible Solution
Computer powered off Processor thermal 1. Ensure computer air vents are not
automatically and the protection activated: blocked and the cooling fan is
Power LED flashes Red A fan may be blocked or running.
two times, once every not turning. 2. Open hood, press power button,
second, followed by a and see if the processor fan
OR
two second pause, and spins. If not spinning, make sure
the computer beeps two The heatsink is not
the fan's cable is plugged onto
times. Beeps continue properly attached to the
the system board header.
for five iterations after processor.
3. Replace the processor
which the LED flashes
heatsink-fan assembly.
will continue until the
problem is resolved.
System does not power System unable to power Press and hold the power button for
on and the LEDs on the on. less than 4 seconds. If the hard drive
front of the computer LED turns green, then:
are not flashing. 1. Check that the voltage selector,
located on the rear of the power
supply on some models, is set to
the appropriate voltage. Proper
voltage setting depends on your
region.
2. Remove the expansion cards one
at a time until the 5V_aux light on
the system board turns on.
3. Replace the system board.
OR
Press and hold the power button for
less than 4 seconds. The hard drive
LED does not turn on green.
1. Check that the unit is plugged
into a working AC outlet.
2. Open hood and check that the
power button harness is properly
connected to the system board.
3. Check that both power supply
cables are properly connected to
the system board.
4. Check to see if the 5V_aux light
on the system board is turned on.
If it is turned on, then replace the
power button harness.
5. If the 5V_aux light on the system
board is off, then replace the
power supply.
6. Replace the system board.

D–4 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Power Supply Problems


Solving Power Supply Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Power supply shuts down Voltage selector switch Select the proper AC voltage using
intermittently. on rear of computer the selector switch.
chassis (some models) is
not switched to correct
line voltage (115V or
230V).
Power supply will not Replace the power supply.
turn on because of
internal power supply
fault.
Computer powered off Processor thermal 1. Ensure that the computer air
automatically and the protection activated: vents are not blocked and the
Power LED flashes Red two A fan may be blocked cooling fan is running.
times, once every second, or not turning. 2. Open hood, press the power
followed by a two second button, and see if the processor
OR
pause, and the computer fan spins. If the processor fan is
beeps two times. Beeps The heatsink/fan
not spinning, make sure the
continue for five iterations assembly is not properly
fan's cable is plugged onto the
after which the LED flashes attached to the
system board header.
will continue until the processor.
problem is resolved. 3. If the fan is pugged in and
seated but not spinning, replace
the processor fan.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–5


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Power Supply Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Power LED flashes Red, four Power failure (power 1. Check that the voltage selector
times, once every second, supply is overloaded). (some models), is set to the
followed by a two second appropriate voltage. Proper
pause, and the computer voltage depends on the region.
beeps four times. Beeps 2. Open the hood and ensure the
continue for five iterations 4- or 6-wire power supply cable
after which the LED flashes is seated into the connector on
will continue until the the system board.
problem is resolved.
3. Check if a device is causing the
problem by removing ALL
attached devices (such as hard,
diskette or optical drives, and
expansion cards). Power on the
system. If the system enters the
POST, then power off and
replace one device at a time
and repeat this procedure until
failure occurs. Replace the
device causing the failure.
Continue adding devices one at
a time to ensure all devices are
functioning properly.
4. Replace the power supply.
5. Replace the system board.

D–6 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Diskette Problems


Solving Diskette Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Diskette drive light stays on. Diskette is damaged. In Microsoft Windows XP, right-click
Start, click Explore, and select a
drive. Select File > Properties >
Tools. Under Error-checking,
click Check Now.
Diskette is incorrectly Remove diskette and reinsert.
inserted.
Drive cable is not Reconnect power cable. Ensure that
properly connected. all four pins are connected.
Drive not found. Cable is loose. Reseat diskette drive data and
power cables.
Removable drive is not Reseat the drive.
seated properly.
Diskette drive cannot write Diskette is not Format the diskette.
to a diskette. formatted. 1. From Windows Explorer select
the disk (A) drive.
2. Right-click the drive letter and
select Format.
3. Select the desired options, and
click Start to begin formatting
the diskette.
Diskette is Use another diskette or remove the
write-protected. write protection.
Writing to the wrong Check the drive letter in the path
drive. statement.
Not enough space is 1. Use another diskette.
left on the diskette. 2. Delete unneeded files from
diskette.
Legacy diskette writes Enter Computer Setup and enable
are disabled in Legacy Diskette Write in
Computer Setup. Storage > Storage Options.
Diskette is damaged. Replace the damaged diskette.
Cannot format diskette. Invalid media reported. When formatting a disk in MS-DOS,
you may need to specify diskette
capacity. For example, to format a
1.44-MB diskette, type the following
command at the MS-DOS prompt:
FORMAT A: /F:1440
Disk may be Open the locking device on the
write-protected. diskette.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–7


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Diskette Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Cannot format diskette. Legacy diskette writes Enter Computer Setup and enable
(continued) are disabled in Legacy Diskette Write in
Computer Setup. Storage > Storage Options.
A problem has occurred The directory structure is In Windows XP, right-click Start,
with a disk transaction. bad, or there is a click Explore, and select a drive.
problem with a file. Select File > Properties >
Tools. Under Error-checking,
click Check Now.
Diskette drive cannot read You are using the wrong Check the type of drive that you
a diskette. diskette type for the are using and use the correct
drive type. diskette type.
You are reading the Check the drive letter in the path
wrong drive. statement.
Diskette is damaged. Replace the diskette with a new one.
“Invalid system disk” A diskette that does not When drive activity stops, remove
message is displayed. contain the system files the diskette and press the
needed to start the Spacebar. The computer should
computer has been start up.
inserted in the drive.
Diskette error has Restart the computer by pressing the
occurred. power button.
Cannot Boot to Diskette. Diskette is not bootable. Replace with a bootable diskette.
Diskette boot has been 1. Run Computer Setup and
disabled in Computer enable diskette boot in
Setup. Storage > Boot Order.
2. Run Computer Setup and
enable diskette boot in
Storage > Storage
Options > Removable
Media Boot.

✎ Both steps should be used as


the Removable Media
Boot function overrides the
Boot Order enable
command.
Network server mode is Run Computer Setup and disable
enabled in Computer Network Server Mode in
Setup. Security > Password Options.
Removable media boot Run Computer Setup and enable
has been disabled in Removable Media Boot in
Computer Setup. Storage > Storage Options>
Removable Media Boot.

D–8 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Hard Drive Problems


Solving Hard Drive Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Hard drive error occurs. Hard disk has bad Use a utility to locate and block
sectors or has failed. usage of bad sectors. If necessary,
reformat the hard disk.
In Windows XP, right-click Start,
click Explore, and select a drive.
Select File > Properties > Tools.
Under Error-checking, click
Check Now.
Disk transaction problem. Either the directory In Windows XP, right-click Start,
structure is bad or there click Explore, and select a drive.
is a problem with a file. Select File > Properties > Tools.
Under Error-checking, click
Check Now.
Drive not found (identified). Cable could be loose. Check cable connections.
The system may not 1. See reconfiguration directions in
have automatically the Solving Hardware
recognized a newly Installation Problems section. If
installed device. the system still does not
recognize the new device,
check to see if the device is
listed within Computer Setup. If
it is listed, the probable cause is
a driver problem. If it is not
listed, the probable cause is a
hardware problem.
2. If this is a newly installed drive,
enter Setup and try adding a
POST delay under Advanced
> Power-On.
The device is attached Run Computer Setup and ensure the
to a SATA port that has device’s SATA port is enabled in
been disabled in Storage > Storage Options.
Computer Setup.
Drive responds slowly Run Computer Setup and increase
immediately after the POST Delay in Advanced >
power-up. Power-On Options.
Nonsystem disk/NTLDR System is trying to start Remove the diskette from the diskette
missing message from a non bootable drive.
diskette.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–9


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Hard Drive Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Nonsystem disk/NTLDR System is trying to start 1. Insert a bootable diskette into
missing message from the hard drive, but the diskette drive and restart the
(continued) the hard drive may have computer.
been damaged. 2. Check hard drive format using
fdisk:
If NTFS formatting, use a third
party reader to evaluate the
drive.
If FAT32 formatting, the hard
drive cannot be accessed.
System files missing or 1. Insert a bootable system diskette
not properly installed. and restart.
2. Check hard drive format using
fdisk:
If NTFS formatting, use a third
party reader to evaluate the
drive.
If FAT32 formatting, the hard
drive cannot be accessed.
3. Install system files for the
appropriate operating system.
Hard drive boot Run the Computer Setup utility and
disabled in Computer enable the hard drive entry in the
Setup. Storage > Boot Order list.
Bootable hard drive is If attempting to boot from a hard
not attached as first in a drive, ensure it is attached to system
multi-hard drive board connector labeled P60
configuration. SATA 0.
Bootable hard drive's Run the Computer Setup utility and
controller is not listed select Storage > Boot Order
first in the Boot Order. and ensure the bootable hard
drive's controller is listed
immediately under the Hard Drive
entry.
Computer will not boot The device is attached Run the Computer Setup utility and
from hard drive. to a SATA port that has ensure the device's SATA port is
been disabled in enabled in Storage > Storage
Computer Setup. Options.
Boot order is not Run the Computer Setup utility and
correct. change boot sequence in Storage
> Boot Order.
Hard Drive's “Emulation Run the Computer Setup utility and
Type” is set to “None.” change the “Emulation Type” to
“Hard Disk” in the device's details
under Storage > Device
Configuration.

D–10 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Hard Drive Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Computer will not boot The device is attached Run the Computer Setup utility and
from hard drive. to a SATA port that has ensure the device's SATA port is
(continued) been disabled in enabled in Storage > Storage
Computer Setup. Options.
Hard drive is damaged. Observe if the front panel Power LED
is blinking RED and if any beeps are
heard.
See the Worldwide Limited
Warranty for terms and conditions.
Computer seems to be Program in use has Attempt the normal Windows “Shut
locked up. stopped responding to Down” procedure. If this fails, press
commands. the power button for four or more
seconds to turn off the power. To
restart the computer, press the
power button.

Solving Media Card Reader Problems


Solving Media Card Reader Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Media card will not work in By default, Windows XP Either format the media card in the
a digital camera after will format any media digital camera or select FAT file
formatting it in Microsoft card with a capacity system to format the media card in a
Windows XP. greater than 32MB with computer with Windows XP.
the FAT32 format. Most
digital cameras use the
FAT (FAT16 & FAT12)
format and can not
operate with a FAT32
formatted card.
A write-protected or locked Media card is locked. If using an SD card, make sure that
error occurs when Locking the media card the lock tab located on the right of
attempting to write to the is a safety feature that the SD card is not in the locked
media card. prevents writing to and position. If using a Memory
deleting from an Stick/PRO card, make sure that the
SD/Memory Stick/ PRO lock tab located on the bottom of
card. the Memory Stick/PRO card is not
in the locked position.
Cannot write to the media The media card is a Check the manufacturer’s
card. read-only memory documentation included with your
(ROM) card. card to see if it writable. Refer to the
previous section for a list of
compatible cards.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–11


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Media Card Reader Problems


Unable to access data on The media card is not Ensure that the card is inserted
the media card after inserted properly, is properly with the gold contact on
inserting it into a slot. inserted in the wrong the correct side. The green LED will
slot, or is not supported. light if inserted properly.
Do not know how to The computer’s software Open My Computer, right-click
remove a media card is used to safely eject on the corresponding drive icon,
correctly. the card. and select Eject. Then pull the card
out of the slot.

✎ Never remove the card when


the green LED is flashing.
After installing the media The operating system Wait a few seconds so that the
card reader and booting to needs time to recognize operating system can recognize the
Windows, the reader and the device if the reader reader and the available ports, and
the inserted cards are not was just installed into then recognize whatever media is
recognized by the the computer and you inserted in the reader.
computer. are turning the PC on
for the first time.
After inserting a media The inserted media card If you do not want to boot from the
card in the reader, the has boot capability. media card, remove it during boot
computer attempts to boot or do not select the option to boot
from the media card. from the inserted media card during
the boot process.
Computer will not boot The media card reader The bootable USB device will have
from a USB removable is connected to the boot support if you connect the
drive or media that is computer via the PCI media card reader to an available
inserted in the USB port on card, which is not USB connector on the computer’s
the media card reader. supported on the HP system board. If no connector is
Desktop BIOS. available, plug the bootable device
into a different USB port on the
computer.
After installing the media The USB cable for the Reconnect the cable for the front
card reader, the front USB front USB ports was USB ports. Install the PCI card and
ports on the computer do disconnected so that the connect the media reader to the
not work. system board connector USB connector on the PCI card.
could be used for the
reader.

D–12 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Display Problems


Solving Display Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Blank screen (no video). Monitor is not turned on Turn on the monitor and check that
and monitor light is not the monitor light is on.
on.
Bad monitor. Try a different monitor.
The cable connections Check the cable connections from
are not correct. the monitor to the computer and to
the electrical outlet.
Screen blanking utility Press any key or click the mouse
installed or energy button and, if set, type your
saver features enabled. password.
System ROM is Reflash the system ROM with the
corrupted; system is latest BIOS image.
running in Boot Block
Emergency Recovery
Mode (indicated by
eight red blinks from the
power LED and eight
simultaneous beeps).
Fixed-sync monitor will Ensure that the monitor can accept
not sync at the the same horizontal scan rate as the
resolution chosen. resolution chosen.
Computer is in Press the power button to resume
standby mode. from standby mode.

Ä When attempting to resume


from standby mode, do
not hold down the power
button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the
computer will shut down
and you will lose any
unsaved data.
Monitor cable plugged If the computer system has both
into the wrong an integrated graphics connector
connector. and an add-in graphics card
connector, plug the monitor cable
into the graphics card connector on
the back of the computer.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–13


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Display Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Blank screen (no video). Monitor settings in the 1. Restart the computer and press
(continued) computer are not F8 during startup when you see
compatible with the “Press F8” in the bottom right
monitor. corner of the screen.
2. Using the keyboard arrow keys,
select Enable VGA Mode
and press Enter.
3. In Windows Control Panel,
double-click the Display icon
and select the Settings tab.
4. Use the sliding control to reset
the resolution.
Cannot enable integrated On systems with Intel The integrated graphics can be
graphics after installing a integrated graphics, the enabled in Computer Setup if a
PCI Express graphics card. integrated graphics standard PCI graphics card is
cannot be enabled after installed.
installing a PCI Express
graphics card.
Blank screen and the Pre-video memory error. 1. Reseat DIMMs. Power on the
power LED flashes Red five system.
times, once every second, 2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to
followed by a two second isolate the faulty module.
pause, and the computer
beeps five times. Beeps 3. Replace third-party memory
continue for five iterations with HP memory.
after which the LED flashes 4. Replace the system board.
will continue until the
problem is resolved.
Blank screen and the Pre-video graphics For systems with a graphics card:
power LED flashes Red six error. 1. Reseat the graphics card. Power
times, once every second, on the system.
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer 2. Replace the graphics card.
beeps six times. Beeps 3. Replace the system board.
continue for five iterations For systems with integrated
after which the LED flashes graphics, replace the system board.
will continue until the
problem is resolved.

D–14 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Display Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Blank screen and the System board failure Replace the system board.
power LED flashes Red (ROM detected failure
seven times, once every prior to video.)
second, followed by a two
second pause, and the
computer beeps seven
times. Beeps continue for
five iterations after which
the LED flashes will
continue until the problem
is resolved.
Monitor does not function Monitor without energy Disable monitor energy saver
properly when used with saver capabilities is feature.
energy saver features. being used with energy
saver features enabled.
Dim characters. The brightness and Adjust the monitor brightness and
contrast controls are not contrast controls.
set properly.
Cables are not properly Check that the graphics cable is
connected. securely connected to the graphics
card and the monitor.
Blurry video or requested If the graphics controller Install the video drivers included in
resolution cannot be set. was upgraded, the the upgrade kit.
correct video drivers
may not be loaded.
Monitor is not capable Change requested resolution.
of displaying requested
resolution.
Graphics card is bad. Replace the graphics card.
The picture is broken up, The monitor connections 1. Be sure the monitor cable is
rolls, jitters, or flashes. may be incomplete or securely connected to the
the monitor may be computer.
incorrectly adjusted. 2. In a two-monitor system or if
another monitor is in close
proximity, be sure the monitors
are not interfering with each
other’s electromagnetic field by
moving them apart.
3. Fluorescent lights or fans may
be too close to the monitor.
Monitor needs to be Degauss the monitor.
degaussed.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–15


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Display Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Image is not centered. Position may need Press the Menu button to access the
adjustment. OSD menu. Select
ImageControl/Horizontal
Position or VerticalPosition to
adjust the horizontal or vertical
position of the image.
“No Connection, Check Monitor video cable is Connect the video cable between
Signal Cable” displays on disconnected. the monitor and computer.
screen.
Ä Ensure the computer power is
off while connecting the video
cable.
“Out of Range” displays on Video resolution and Restart the computer and enter Safe
screen. refresh rate are set Mode. Change the settings to a
higher than what the supported setting then restart the
monitor supports. computer so that the new settings
take effect.
Vibrating or rattling noise Monitor degaussing coil None. It is normal for the
coming from inside a CRT has been activated. degaussing coil to be activated
monitor when powered on. when the monitor is powered on.
Clicking noise coming from Electronic relays have None. It is normal for some monitors
inside a CRT monitor. been activated inside to make a clicking noise when
the monitor. turned on and off, when going in
and out of standby mode, and when
changing resolutions.
High pitched noise coming Brightness and/or Lower brightness and/or contrast
from inside a flat panel contrast settings are too settings.
monitor. high.
Fuzzy focus; streaking, Flat panel monitor’s 1. Select the monitor’s
ghosting, or shadowing internal digital Auto-Adjustment option in the
effects; horizontal scrolling conversion circuits may monitor’s on-screen display
lines; faint vertical bars; or be unable to correctly menu.
unable to center the picture interpret the output 2. Manually synchronize the Clock
on the screen. synchronization of the and Clock Phase on-screen
(flat panel monitors using graphics card. display functions. To download
an analog VGA input a SoftPaq that will assist you
connection only) with the synchronization, go to
the following Web site, select
the appropriate monitor, and
download either SP32347 or
SP32202:
http://www.hp.com/support
Graphics card is not 1. Reseat the graphics card.
seated properly or is 2. Replace the graphics card.
bad.

D–16 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Display Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Certain typed symbols do The font you are using Use the Character Map to locate the
not appear correct. does not support that and select the appropriate symbol.
particular symbol. Click Start > All Programs >
Accessories > System Tools >
Character Map. You can copy
the symbol from the Character Map
into a document.

Solving Audio Problems


Solving Audio Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Sound cuts in and out. Processor resources are Shut down all open
being used by other processor-intensive applications.
applications.
Direct sound latency, In Windows XP:
common in many media 1. From the Control Panel,
player applications. select Sounds and Audio
Devices.
2. On the Audio tab, select a
device from the Sound
Playback list.
3. Click the Advanced, button
and select the Performance
tab.
4. Set the Hardware
acceleration slider to None
and the Sample rate
conversion quality slider to
Good and retest the audio.
5. Set the Hardware
acceleration slider to Full
and the Sample rate
conversion quality slider to
Best and retest the audio.
Sound does not come Software volume control Double-click the Speaker icon on
out of the speaker or is turned down. the taskbar, then make sure that
headphones. Mute is not selected and use the
volume slider to adjust the volume.
Audio is hidden in Enable the audio in Computer
Computer Setup. Setup: Security > Device
Security >Audio.
The external speakers Turn on the external speakers.
are not turned on.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–17


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Audio Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Sound does not come External speakers See the sound card documentation
out of the speaker or plugged into the wrong for proper speaker connection.
headphones. audio jack.
(continued)
Digital CD audio is not Enable digital CD audio:
enabled. 1. From the Control Panel, select
System.
2. On the Hardware tab, click
the Device Manager button.
3. Right-click on the CD/DVD
device and select Properties.
4. On the Properties tab, make
sure “Enable digital CD
audio for this CD-ROM
device” is checked.
Headphones or devices Turn on and use headphones or
connected to the external speakers, if connected, or
line-out connector mute disconnect headphones or external
the internal speaker. speakers.
Volume is muted. 1. From the Control Panel
program, click Sound,
Speech and Audio
Devices, then click Sounds
and Audio Devices.
2. Click the Mute check box to
remove the check mark from
the box.
Computer is in Press the power button to resume
standby mode. from standby mode.

Ä When attempting to resume


from standby mode, do
not hold down the power
button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the
computer will shut down
and any unsaved data will
be lost.
Sound from headphones is Headphones are Plug the headphones into the
not clear or muffled. plugged into the rear headphone connector on the front of
audio output connector. the computer.
The rear audio
connector is for
powered audio devices
and is not designed for
headphone use.

D–18 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Audio Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Computer appears to be The hard disk may be Before recording, make sure there is
locked up while recording full. enough free space on the hard disk.
audio. You can also try recording the audio
file in a compressed format.

Solving Printer Problems


Solving Printer Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Printer will not print. Printer is not turned on Turn the printer on and make sure it
and online. is online.
The correct printer 1. Install the correct printer driver
driver for the for the application.
application are not 2. Try printing using the
installed. MS-DOS command:
DIR C:\ > [printer port]
where [printer port] is the
address of the printer being
used. If the printer works, reload
the printer driver.
If you are on a network, Make the proper network
you may not have made connections to the printer.
the connection to the
printer.
Printer may have failed. Run printer self-test.
Printer will not turn on. The cables may not be Reconnect all cables and check the
connected properly. power cord and electrical outlet.
Printer prints garbled The correct printer Install the correct printer driver for
information. driver for the the application.
application is not
installed.
The cables may not be Reconnect all cables.
connected properly.
Printer memory may be Reset the printer by turning it off for
overloaded. one minute, then turn it back on.
Printer is offline. The printer may be out Check the paper tray and refill it if
of paper. it is empty. Select online.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–19


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems


Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Keyboard commands and Keyboard connector 1. On the Windows Desktop, click
typing are not recognized is not properly Start.
by the computer. connected. 2. Click Shut Down. The Shut
Down Windows dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select Shut down.
4. After the shutdown is complete,
reconnect the keyboard to the
back of the computer and
restart the computer.
Program in use has Shut down the computer using
stopped responding the mouse and then restart the
to commands. computer.
Keyboard needs See the Worldwide Limited
repairs. Warranty for terms and conditions.
Wireless device error. 1. Check software, if available, for
device status.
2. Check/replace device batteries.
3. Reset receiver and keyboard.
Computer is in Press the power button to resume
standby mode. from standby mode.

Ä When attempting to resume


from standby mode, do
not hold down the power
button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the
computer will shut down
and any unsaved data will
be lost.
Cursor will not move using The Num Lock key Press the Num Lock key. The
the arrow keys on the may be on. Num Lock light should not be on if
keypad. you want to use the arrow keys. The
Num Lock key can be disabled
(or enabled) in Computer Setup.

D–20 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Mouse does not respond to Mouse connector is 1. Press Ctrl and Esc at the same
movement or is too slow. not properly plugged time (or press the Windows
into the back of the logo key) to display the Start
computer. menu.
2. Use the up or down arrow key
to select Shut Down and then
press Enter.
3. Use the up or down arrow
key to select the Shut Down
option and then press Enter.
4. After the shutdown is complete,
plug the mouse connector into
the back of the computer (or the
keyboard) and restart.
Program in use has Shut down the computer using the
stopped responding keyboard and then restart the
to commands. computer.
Mouse may need Remove the roller ball cover on the
cleaning. mouse and clean the internal
components.
Mouse may need See the Worldwide Limited
repair. Warranty for terms and conditions.
Wireless device error. 1. Check software, if available, for
device status.
2. Check/replace device batteries.
3. Reset receiver and mouse.
Computer is in Press the power button to resume
standby mode. from standby mode.

Ä When attempting to resume


from standby mode, do
not hold down the power
button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the
computer will shut down
and you will lose any
unsaved data.
Mouse will only move Mouse roller ball or the Remove roller ball cover from the
vertically or horizontally, or rotating encoder shafts bottom of the mouse and clean the
movement is jerky. that make contact with internal components with a mouse
the ball are dirty. cleaning kit.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–21


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Hardware Installation Problems


You may need to reconfigure the computer when you add or remove hardware, such as an
additional diskette drive. If you install a plug and play device, Windows XP automatically
recognizes the device and configures the computer. If you install a non–plug and play device, you
must reconfigure the computer after completing installation of the new hardware. In Windows
XP, use the Add Hardware Wizard and follow the instructions that appear on the screen.

WARNING: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to the
Å system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be sure to
disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to cool before
touching.

Look for the LED between the DIMM sockets. If the LED is illuminated, the system still has power. Power off
the computer and remove the power cord before proceeding.

Solving Hardware Installation Problems


Problem Cause Solution
A new device is not Device is not seated or Ensure that the device is properly
recognized as part of connected properly. and securely connected and that
the system. pins in the connector are not
bent down.
Cable(s) of new Ensure that all cables are properly
external device are and securely connected and that
loose or power cables pins in the cable or connector are
are unplugged. not bent down.
Power switch of new Turn off the computer, turn on the
external device is not external device, then turn on the
turned on. computer to integrate the device
with the computer system.
When the system Reboot the computer and follow the
advised you of changes instructions for accepting the
to the configuration, you changes.
did not accept them.
A plug and play board Use Windows XP Device Manager
may not automatically to deselect the automatic settings for
configure when the board and choose a basic
added if the default configuration that does not cause a
configuration conflicts resource conflict. You can also use
with other devices. Computer Setup to reconfigure or
disable devices to resolve the
resource conflict.
USB ports on the Enter Computer Setup (F10) and
computer are disabled enable the USB ports.
in Computer Setup.

D–22 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Hardware Installation Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Computer will not start. Wrong memory 1. Review the documentation that
modules were used in came with the system to
the upgrade or memory determine if you are using the
modules were installed correct memory modules and to
in the wrong location. verify the proper installation.

✎ DIMM 1 must always be


installed.
2. Observe the beeps and LED
lights on the front of the
computer. See Appendix C
“POST Error Messages” to
determine possible causes.
Power LED flashes Red five Memory is installed
times, once every second, incorrectly or is bad.
Ä ToDIMMs
avoid damage to the
or the system board,
you must unplug the computer
followed by a two second power cord before attempting
pause, and the computer to reseat, install, or remove a
beeps five times. Beeps DIMM module.
continue for five iterations 1. Reseat DIMMs. Power on the
after which the LED flashes system.
will continue until the 2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to
problem is resolved. isolate the faulty module.

✎ DIMM 1 must always be


installed.
3. Replace third-party memory
with HP memory.
4. Replace the system board.
Power LED flashes Red six Graphics card is not For systems with a graphics card:
times, once every second, seated properly or is 1. Reseat the graphics card. Power
followed by a two second bad, or system board is on the system.
pause, and the computer bad.
beeps six times. Beeps 2. Replace the graphics card.
continue for five iterations 3. Replace the system board.
after which the LED flashes For systems with integrated
will continue until the graphics, replace the system board.
problem is resolved.
Power LED flashes Red ten Bad option card. 1. Check each option card by
times, once every second, removing the cards one at time
followed by a two second (if multiple cards), then power
pause, and the computer on the system to see if fault goes
beeps ten times. Beeps away.
continue for five iterations 2. Once bad card is identified,
after which the LED flashes remove and replace bad option
will continue until the card.
problem is resolved
3. Replace the system board.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–23


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Network Problems


These guidelines do not discuss the process of debugging the network cabling.

Solving Network Problems


Problem Cause Solution
Wake-on-LAN feature is Wake-on-LAN is not Enable Wake-on-LAN.
not functioning. enabled. 1. Select Start > Control
Panel.
2. Double-click Network
Connections.
3. Double-click Local Area
Connection.
4. Click Properties.
5. Click Configure.
6. Click the Power
Management tab, then
select the check box to Allow
this device to bring the
computer out of standby.
Network driver does Network controller is 1. Run Computer Setup and
not detect network disabled. enable network controller.
controller. 2. Enable the network controller in
the operating system via the
Device Manager.
Incorrect network driver. Check the network controller
documentation for the correct driver
or obtain the latest driver from the
manufacturer’s Web site.
Network status link light No active network is Check cabling and network
never flashes. detected. equipment for proper connection.

✎ The network status


light should flash
Network controller is not
set up properly.
Check for the device status within
Windows, such as Device
when there is
Manager for driver load and the
network activity.
Network Connections applet
within Windows for link status.
Network controller is 1. Run Computer Setup and
disabled. enable network controller.
2. Enable the network controller in
the operating system via Device
Manager.
Network driver is not Reinstall network drivers.
properly loaded.
System cannot autosense Disable auto-sensing capabilities
the network. and force the system into the correct
operating mode.

D–24 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Network Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Diagnostics reports a The cable is not securely Ensure that the cable is securely
failure. connected. attached to the network connector
and that the other end of the cable
is securely attached to the correct
device.
The cable is attached to Ensure that the cable is attached to
the incorrect connector. the correct connector.
There is a problem with Ensure that the cable and device at
the cable or a device at the other end are operating
the other end of the cable. correctly.
Network controller Under the Computer Setup
interrupt is shared with Advanced menu, change the
an expansion board. resource settings for the board.
The network controller Replace the system board (NIC is
is defective. integral to the system board).
Diagnostics passes, but Network drivers are not Make sure the network drivers are
the computer does not loaded, or driver loaded and that the driver
communicate with the parameters do not match parameters match the configuration
network. current configuration. of the network controller.
Make sure the correct network client
and protocol is installed.
The network controller is Select the Network icon in the
not configured for this Control Panel and configure the
computer. network controller.
Network controller Network controller Under the Computer Setup
stopped working when interrupt is shared with an Advanced menu, change the
an expansion board was expansion board. resource settings for the board.
added to the computer.
The network controller Verify that the drivers were not
requires drivers. accidentally deleted when the
drivers for a new expansion board
were installed.
The expansion board Under the Computer Setup
installed is a network card Advanced menu, change the
(NIC) and conflicts with resource settings for the board.
the embedded NIC.
Network controller stops The files containing the Reinstall the network drivers, using
working without apparent network drivers are the Restore Plus! CD.
cause. corrupted.
The cable is not securely Ensure that the cable is securely
connected. attached to the network connector
and that the other end of the cable
is securely attached to the correct
device.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–25


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Network Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Network controller stops The network controller is Replace the system board.
working without apparent defective.
cause.
(continued)
New network card will New network card may be Install a working, industry-standard
not boot. defective or may not meet NIC, or change the boot sequence
industry-standard to boot from another source.
specifications.
Cannot connect to The network controller is Verify Network Connectivity, that a
network server when not configured properly. DHCP Server is present, and that
attempting Remote the Remote System Installation
System Installation. Server contains the NIC drivers for
your NIC.
System setup utility Unprogrammed EEPROM. Flash the ROM.
reports unprogrammed
EEPROM.

D–26 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Memory Problems


CAUTION: Power may still be supplied to the DIMMs when the computer is turned off (depending on
Ä the Management Engine (ME) settings). To avoid damage to the DIMMs or the system board, you must
unplug the computer power cord before attempting to reseat, install, or remove a DIMM module.

For those systems that support ECC memory, HP does not support mixing ECC and non-ECC memory.
Otherwise, the system will not boot the operating system.

✎ enabled.
The memory count will be affected by configurations with the Management Engine (ME)
The ME uses 8MB of system memory in single channel mode or 16 MB of memory in
dual-channel mode to download, decompress, and execute the ME firmware for Out-of-Band
(OOB), third-party data storage, and other management functions.

Solving Memory Problems


Problem Cause Solution
System will not boot or A memory module is
Ensure that a memory module is
does not function properly not installed in the installed in the black XMM1 socket
after installing additional XMM1 socket.
on the system board. This socket
memory modules. must be populated with a memory
module.
Memory module is not Replace module with the correct
the correct type or industry-standard device for the
speed grade for this computer. On some models, ECC
system or the new and non-ECC memory modules
memory module is not cannot be mixed.
seated properly.
Out of memory error. Memory configuration Use the Device Manager to check
may not be set up memory configuration.
correctly.
You have run out of Check the application
memory to run the documentation to determine the
application. memory requirements.
Memory count during POST The memory modules Check that the memory modules
is wrong. may not be installed have been installed correctly and
correctly. that proper modules are used.
Integrated graphics may No action required.
use system memory.
Insufficient memory error Too many Terminate Delete any TSRs that you do
during operation. and Stay Resident not need.
programs (TSRs) are
installed.
You have run out of Check the memory requirements for
memory for the the application or add more
application. memory to the computer.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–27


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Memory Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Power LED flashes Red five Memory is installed 1. Reseat DIMMs. Power on the
times, once every second, incorrectly or is bad. system.
followed by a two second 2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to
pause, and the computer isolate the faulty module.
beeps five times. Beeps
continue for five iterations 3. Replace third-party memory
after which the LED flashes with HP memory.
will continue until the 4. Replace the system board.
problem is resolved.

Solving Processor Problems


.

Solving Processor Problems


Problem Cause Solution
Poor performance is Processor is hot. 1. Make sure the airflow to the
experienced. computer is not blocked.
2. Make sure the fans are
connected and working
properly (some fans only
operate when needed).
3. Make sure the processor
heatsink is installed properly.
Power LED flashes Red Processor is not seated 1. Check to see that the processor
three times, once every properly or not is present.
second, followed by a two installed. 2. Reseat the processor.
second pause, and the
computer beeps three
times. Beeps continue for
five iterations after which
the LED flashes will
continue until the problem
is resolved.

D–28 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems


Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems
Problem Cause Solution
System will not boot from The device is attached Run the Computer Setup utility and
CD-ROM or DVD drive. to a SATA port that has ensure the device's SATA port is
been disabled in the enabled in Storage > Storage
Computer Setup utility. Options.
Removable Media Boot Run the Computer Setup utility and
is disenabled through enable booting to removable media
the Computer Setup in Storage > Storage Options.
utility. Ensure CDROM is enabled in
Storage > Boot Order.
Network Server Mode Run the Computer Setup utility and
is enabled in Computer disable Network Server Mode in
Setup. Security > Password Options.
Non-bootable CD in Try a bootable CD in the drive.
drive.
Boot order not correct. Run Computer Setup and change
boot sequence in Storage > Boot
Order.
Drive not found (identified). Cable could be loose. Check cable connections.
The system may not See reconfiguration directions in the
have automatically Solving Hardware Installation
recognized a newly Problems section. If the system still
installed device. does not recognize the new device,
check to see if the device is listed
within Computer Setup. If it is listed,
the probable cause is a driver
problem. If it is not listed, the
probable cause is a hardware
problem.
If this is a newly installed drive, run
the Computer Setup utility and try
adding a POST delay under
Advanced > Power-On.
The device is attached Run the Computer Setup utility and
to a SATA port that has ensure the device's SATA port is
been disabled in enabled in Storage > Storage
Computer Setup. Options.
Drive responds slowly Run Computer Setup and increase
immediately after the POST Delay in Advanced >
power-up. Power-On Options.
CD-ROM or DVD devices Drive is not connected See the documentation that came
are not detected or driver is properly or not properly with the optional device.
not loaded. configured.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–29


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Movie will not play in the Movie may be See the documentation that came
DVD drive. regionalized for a with the DVD drive.
different country.
Decoder software is not Install decoder software.
installed.
Damaged media. Replace media.
Movie rating locked out Use DVD software to remove
by parental lock. parental lock.
Media installed upside Reinstall media.
down.
Cannot eject compact disc Disc not properly seated 1. Turn off the computer and insert
(tray-load unit). in the drive. a thin metal rod into the
emergency eject hole and push
firmly.
2. Slowly pull the tray out from the
drive until the tray is fully
extended, then remove the disc.
CD-ROM, CD-RW, Media has been Re-insert the Media with the label
DVD-ROM, or DVD-R/RW inserted upside down. facing up.
drive cannot read a disc or
The DVD-ROM drive Wait at least 30 seconds to let the
takes too long to start.
takes longer to start DVD-ROM drive determine the type
because it has to of media being played. If the disc
determine the type of still does not start, read the other
media played, such as solutions listed for this topic.
audio or video.
CD or DVD disc is dirty. Clean CD or DVD with a CD
cleaning kit.
Windows does not 1. Use Device Manager to remove
detect the CD-ROM or or uninstall the device in
DVD-ROM drive. question.
2. Restart the computer and let
Windows detect the device.
Recording audio CDs is Wrong or poor quality 1. Try using a slower recording
difficult or impossible. media type. speed.
2. Verify that you are using the
correct media for the drive.
3. Try a different brand of media.
Quality varies widely between
manufacturers.
USDT computer boots too The system is searching Disconnect the drive cable from the
slowly after removing a for the drive during boot system board.
CD-ROM or DVD drive. because the drive cable
is still attached to the
system board.

D–30 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Drive Key Problems


Solving Drive Key Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Drive Key is not seen as a The drive letter after the Change the default drive letter for
drive letter in Windows XP. last physical drive is not the Drive Key in Windows XP.
available.
USB Drive Key not found The device is attached Run the Computer Setup utility and
(identified). to a USB port that has ensure that Device available is
been hidden in selected for All USB Ports and
Computer Setup. Front USB Ports under Security
> Device Security.
The device was not Ensure the device is fully inserted
properly seated before into the USB port before applying
power-up. power to the system.
System will not boot from Boot order is not Run the Computer Setup utility and
USB Drive Key. correct. change boot sequence in Storage
> Boot Order.
Removable Media Boot Run the Computer Setup utility and
is disabled in the enable booting to removable media
Computer Setup utility. in Storage > Storage Options.
Ensure USB is enabled in Storage
> Boot Order.
The image on the Follow the procedures described in
device is not bootable. the “ROM Flash: Replicating the
Setup: Creating a Bootable Device:
Supported USB Flash Media
Device” section of the Service
Reference Guide.
The computer boots to DOS Drive Key is bootable. Install the Drive Key after the
after making a bootable operating system boots.
Drive Key.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–31


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Front Panel Component Problems


Solving Front Panel Component Problems
Problem Cause Solution
A USB device, headphone, It is not properly 1. Turn off the computer.
or microphone is not connected. 2. Reconnect the device to the front of
recognized by the the computer and restart the
computer. computer.
The device does not If the USB device requires AC power,
have power. be sure one end is connected to the
device and one end is connected to a
live outlet.
The correct device 1. Install the correct driver for the
driver is not installed. device.
2. You might need to reboot the
computer.
The cable from the 1. If possible, replace the cable.
device to the computer 2. Restart the computer.
does not work.
The device is not 1. Replace the device.
working. 2. Restart the computer.

D–32 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Internet Access Problems


Solving Internet Access Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Unable to connect to the Internet Service Provider Verify Internet settings or contact the
Internet. (ISP) account is not set ISP for assistance.
up properly.
Modem is not set up Reconnect the modem. Verify the
properly. connections are correct using the
quick setup documentation.
Web browser is not set Verify that the Web browser is
up properly. installed and set up to work with
your ISP.
Cable/DSL modem is Plug in cable/DSL modem. You
not plugged in. should see a “power” LED light on
the front of the cable/DSL modem.
Cable/DSL service is Try connecting to the Internet at a
not available or has later time or contact your ISP. (If the
been interrupted due to cable/DSL service is connected, the
bad weather. “cable” LED light on the front of the
cable/DSL modem will be on.)
The CAT5 UTP cable is Connect the CAT5 UTP cable
disconnected. between the cable modem and the
computers’s RJ-45 connector. (If the
connection is good, the “PC” LED
light on the front of the cable/DSL
modem will be on.)
IP address is not Contact the ISP for the correct IP
configured properly. address.
Cookies are corrupted. Windows XP
1. Select Start > Control
Panel.
2. Double-click Internet
Options.
3. On the General tab, click the
Delete Cookies button.
Windows 2000
1. Select Start > Settings >
Control Panel.
2. Double-click Internet
Options.
3. On the General tab, click the
Delete Cookies button.
Cannot automatically You must log on to the Log on to the ISP and launch the
launch Internet programs. ISP before some desired program.
programs will start.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–33


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Internet Access Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Internet takes too long to Modem is not set up Verify that the correct modem speed
download Web sites. properly. and COM port are selected.
For Windows XP
1. Select Start > Control
Panel.
2. Double-click System.
3. Click the Hardware tab.
4. In the Device Manager area,
click the Device Manager
button.
5. Double-click Ports (COM &
LPT).
6. Right-click the COM port your
modem uses, then click
Properties.
7. Under Device status, verify
that the modem is working
properly.
8. Under Device usage, verify
the modem is enabled.
9. If there are further problems,
click the Troubleshoot button
and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Windows 2000
1. Select Start > Settings >
Control Panel.
2. Double-click System.
3. Click the Hardware tab.
4. In the Device Manager area,
click the Device Manager
button.
5. Double-click Ports (COM &
LPT).
6. Right-click the COM port the
modem uses, then click
Properties.
7. Under Device status, verify
that the modem is working
properly.

D–34 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

Solving Internet Access Problems (Continued)


Problem Cause Solution
Internet takes too long to Modem is not set up 8. Under Device usage, verify
download Web sites. properly. the modem is enabled.
(continued) (continued) 9. If there are further problems,
click the Troubleshoot button
and follow the on-screen
instructions.

Solving Software Problems


Most software problems occur as a result of the following:
■ The application was not installed or configured correctly.
■ There is insufficient memory available to run the application.
■ There is a conflict between applications.
■ Be sure that all the needed device drivers have been installed.
■ If you have installed an operating system other than the factory-installed operating system,
check to be sure it is supported on the system.

Solving Software Problems


Problem Cause Solution
Computer will not continue POST error has Observe the beeps and LED lights on
and no HP logo screen has occurred. the front of the computer. See
appeared. Appendix C, POST Error Messages to
determine possible causes.
See the Restore Kit or the Worldwide
Limited Warranty for terms and
conditions.
Computer will not continue System files may be Use recovery diskette to scan hard
after HP logo screen has damaged. drive for errors.
appeared.
“Illegal Operation has Software being used is Verify that the software is certified by
Occurred” error message is not Microsoft-certified Microsoft for your version of Windows
displayed. for your version of (see program packaging for this
Windows. information).
Configuration files are If possible, save all data, close all
corrupt. programs, and restart the computer.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 D–35


Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics

D–36 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


E
System Board and Riser Board Reference
Designators

These reference designators are used on most but not all HP system and riser boards.
Designator Component
BAT Battery socket/Battery
CR1 LED - 5V_Aux (on)
CR2 Health-LED
CR3 UID LED
CR4 Power LED
CR35 Hard drive activity LED
E14 Boot block header/jumper
E15 Boot block recovery header
E16 ROM recovery header
E25 CPLD programming header
E49/JP49 Clear Password header/jumper
E50 Clear CMOS header
J7 RJ45 jack
J9 Stacked RJ45/Dual USB
J10 Quad stacked USB
J11 First IEEE 1394 connector
J12 Second IEEE 1394 connector
J13 SPDIF input
J14 SPDIF output
J20 - 29 PCI slots
J30 PCI extender slot (male)
J31 - J35 PCI Express slots
J37 Primary SCSI connector
J38 Secondary SCSI connector
J39 Stacked parallel/SCSI connector
J40 AGP slot
J41 x16 PCI Express slot for graphics
J50 First parallel port
J51 Second parallel port
J52 Double-stacked parallel port, Top = Port B, Bottom = Port A
J53 Parallel port over single Serial Port
J54 Parallel port over Serial Port and Video Port
J55 Parallel port over dual VGA ports
J65 DVI connector
J66 Keyboard connector, PS/2 (Closest to power supply)
J67 Mouse connector, PS/2

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 E–1


System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators

Designator Component (Continued)


J68 Stacked mouse (Top)/keyboard (Bottom) connector
J69 Video connector, VGA
J70 Primary single USB connector
J71 Secondary single USB port
J72 Microphone jack
J73 Line-in jack
J74 Line-out jack
J75 Headphone jack
J76 Volume control
J77 Double-stacked headphone (Bottom)/microphone (Top) connector
J78 Double-stacked line-in (Top)/line-out (Bottom) connector
J80 Stacked serial/audio connector
J81 Primary double-stack USB, Top = Port 2, Bottom = Port 1
J82 Secondary double-stack USB, Top = Port 4, Bottom = Port 3
J83 Triple-stacked audio jack (line in, line out/headphone, microphone)
J101 Security board connector - for security card
J9020-J9029 PCI slots on riser card
J9030-J9034 PCI express slots on riser card
JP49/E49 Clear password header/jumper
L1 USB front port choke (1st)
L2 USB rear port choke (1st)
L3 USB rear port choke (2nd)
L4 USB rear port choke (3rd)
L5 USB front port choke (2nd)
P1 P/S connector (20 or 24 pin)
P2 Second P/S connector (as required)
P3 Processor 12V header
P4 Secondary Processor 12V header
P5 Main Power/HDD LED connector
P6 Speaker connector
P7 Analog audio connector (from CD-ROM)
P8 Primary chassis fan header or primary CPU heatsink fan
P9 Secondary chassis fan header
P10 Diskette drive connector
P11 Auxiliary Audio connector
P12 Alert on LAN connector
P13 VRM module footprint
P15 AUI connector
P16 Fan command/fan sink header (may be 2 or 4 pin)
P17 Digital audio expansion header
P18 SPDIF internal input header
P19 SPDIF internal output header
P20 Primary IDE connector
P21 Secondary IDE/MultiBay connector
P22 Header for NEWCARD

E–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators

Designator Component (Continued)


P23 Header for front panel audio
P24 Header for front panel USB
P25 Internal USB connector 1
P26 Internal USB connector 2
P27 MultiBay header
P29 SCSI LED connector
P30 PCI extender slot (female)
P40 Blade PC graphics connector (outboard)
P41 Blade PC graphics connector (inboard)
P52 Second serial port
P54 Primary serial port
P55 Double stack serial port, Top = Serial B, Bottom = Serial A
P58 Riser edge connector (male-mates with J30)
P60 Primary Serial ATA (SATA) connector
P61 Second Serial ATA (SATA) connector
P62 Third Serial ATA (SATA) connector
P63 Fourth Serial ATA (SATA) connector
P64 VSFF expansion connector
P65 Graphics option connector
P66 Fifth Serial ATA (SATA) connector
P67 Sixth Serial ATA (SATA) connector
P68 Seventh Serial ATA (SATA) connector
P69 Eighth Serial ATA (SATA) connector
P70 Primary (CPU) fan header for fansink
P71 Secondary CPU fan header for fansink
P80 Primary Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector
P81 Second Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector
P82 Third Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector
P83 Fourth Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector
P84 Fifth Serial Attached (SAS) connector
P85 Sixth Serial Attached (SAS) connector
P86 Seventh Serial Attached (SAS) connector
P87 Eighth Serial Attached (SAS) connector
P101 Security board connector, system board
P106 Secondary speaker connector
P124 Hood lock header
P125 Hood sensor header
P126 Flying parallel port header
P150 Media reader header
P216 White box chassis fan header
SW2 Security hood switch on riser card
SW50 Clear CMOS switch/push button
U2 Single chip solution (combined northbridge/southbridge)
U3 North bridge
U4 South bridge
U5 Super I/O

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 E–3


System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators

Designator Component (Continued)


U6 Clock chip
U7 64 bit Bridge
U10 LOM1
U11 LOM1 EEPROM
U12 LOM1 PHY
U13 Audio Codec
U14 Audio amplifier
U16 LOM2
U17 LOM2 EEPROM
U18 LOM2 PHY
U19 SPI ROM - SOIC-8 footprint
U20 Fan controller
U21 SPI ROM - SO16 footprint
U29 TMDS controller
U30 Parallel port diode array
U31 First serial port transceiver
U32 Second serial port transceiver
U46 VRM controller
U50 USB front port power switch
U51 First USB rear port power switch
U52 Second USB rear port power switch
U53 Third USB rear port power switch
XBT Battery retainer
XMM1 Memory slot. DIMM1 or RIMM1 populated and tested
XMM2 - XMM5 Following memory slots
XU1 Primary processor socket
XU2 Secondary processor socket
XU15/U15 System ROM and Socket (Socket = XU15, ROM = U15)
XU19/U19 SPI ROM and socket (XU19 = socket, U19 = SPI ROM)
Y1 Primary (TH) system clock crystal
Y2 Secondary (SMT) system clock crystal
Y3 Primary NIC clock crystal
Y4 Secondary NIC clock crystal
Y5/H5 RTC clock crystal/tie-down

E–4 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


F
Memory

The dx7300 and dc7700 series computers with Intel-based processors come with double data rate
2 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR2-SDRAM) dual inline memory modules
(DIMMs).

Ä CAUTION: DDR and DDR2 memory modules are not interchangeable.

DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to four industry-standard
DIMMs. These memory module sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled memory
module. To achieve the maximum memory support, you can populate the system board with up
to 8GB of memory configured in a high-performing dual channel mode.
For proper system operation, the DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs must be:
■ industry-standard 240-pin
■ unbuffered PC2-4300 533 MHz-compliant, PC2-5300 667 MHz-compliant, or PC2-6400
800 MHz-compliant
■ 1.8volt DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs
The DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs must also:
■ support CAS latency 4 (DDR2/533 MHz and DDR2/667 MHz) and CAS latency 5
(DDR2/667 MHz and DDR2/800 MHz)
■ contain the mandatory JEDEC SPD information
In addition, the computer supports:
■ 256Mbit, 512Mbit, AND 1 Gbit non-ECC memory technologies
■ single-sided and double-sided DIMMS
■ DIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 DDR devices; DIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM
are not supported

✎ The system will not start if you install unsupported DIMMs.


DIMM Sockets
There are four DIMM sockets on the system board, with two sockets per channel. The sockets are
labeled XMM1, XMM2, XMM3, and XMM4. Sockets XMM1 and XMM2 operate in memory
channel A. Sockets XMM3 and XMM4 operate in memory channel B.

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 F–1


Memory

The system board shown may differ from the one in your product.

Item Description Socket Color


1 DIMM socket XMM1, Channel A Black
2 DIMM socket XMM2, Channel A White
3 DIMM socket XMM3, Channel B White
4 DIMM socket XMM4, Channel B White

The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,
depending on how the DIMMs are installed.
■ The system will operate in single channel mode if the DIMM sockets are populated in one
channel only.
■ The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the total memory
capacity of the DIMMs in Channel A is equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in
Channel B. The technology and device width can vary between the channels. For example, if
Channel A is populated with two 256MB DIMMs and Channel B is populated with one
512MB DIMM, the system will operate in dual channel mode.
■ The system will operate in flex mode if the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel
A is not equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. In flex mode, the
channel populated with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory
assigned to dual channel and the remainder is assigned to single channel. For optimal speed,
the channels should be balanced so that the largest amount of memory is spread between the
two channels. For example, if you are populating the sockets with one 1GB DIMM, two
512MB DIMMs, and one 256MB DIMM, one channel should be populated with the 1GB
DIMM and one 256MB DIMM and the other channel should be populated with the two
512MB DIMMs. With this configuration, 2 GB will run as dual channel and 256 MB will run
as single channel.
■ In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest DIMM in the
system.

F–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Index

4-pin power pin assignments A–6 SFF 7–10


24-pin MicroFit power pin assignments A–6 USDT 8–11
24-pin power pin assignments A–6 cable pinouts
6-pin power pin assignments A–7 SATA data 4–2
SATA power 4–2
A
cautions
access panel
AC power 5–1
CMT removal and replacement 6–5
adding devices 1–1
USDT removal and replacement 8–4
cables 5–8
Active Management Technology 3–7
cooling fan 5–7
adding devices 1–1
cover lock security 3–24
Altiris, Deployment Solution Agent 3–2
electrostatic discharge 5–3
asset tracking 3–16
FailSafe Key 3–25
ATA/ATAPI (IDE) drive cable pin assignments
keyboard cleaning 5–6
A–5
keyboard keys 5–6
B operating system installation 1–1
Backup and Recovery Manager 1–2 protecting ROM BIOS 3–9
backwall, SFF removal and replacement 7–17 CD-ROM connector pin assignments A–5
battery change notification (PCN) 3–8
CMT removal and replacement 6–29 changing password 3–21
disposal 5–9 chassis
SFF removal and replacement 7–45 CMT illustrated 5–1
USDT removal and replacement 8–26 SFF illustrated 5–2
bezel blank, CMT removal and replacement 6–8 USDT illustrated 5–2
bezel insert, SFF removal and replacement 7–8 chassis fan
blank screen D–13 CMT removal and replacement 6–36
Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode 3–10 SFF removal and replacement 7–38
C USDT removal and replacement 8–9
cable chassis types, illustrated 5–1
CMT hard drive removal and replacement 6–20 cleaning
proper handling 5–8 computer 5–6
cable connections keyboard 5–6
CMT 6–10 monitor 5–7
SFF 7–11 mouse 5–7
USDT 8–12 safety precautions 5–6
cable lock 3–25 clearing password 3–22
CMT 6–4 CMT
SFF 7–5 5.25" drive bezel removal and replacement 6–7
USDT 8–3 access panel removal and replacement 6–5
cable management battery removal and replacement 6–29
CMT 6–9 bezel blank removal and replacement 6–8
cable connections 6–10

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 Index–1


Index

cable lock removal and replacement 6–4 overview 2–2


cable management 6–9 Security menu 2–8
chassis fan removal and replacement 6–36 Storage menu 2–5
chassis, illustrated 5–1 configuration settings, recovering 2–14
desktop to minitower conversion 6–39 configuring power button 3–15
disassembly preparation 6–1 connections
diskette drive bezel removal and replacement CMT system board 6–10
6–8 SFF system board 7–11
diskette drive removal and replacement 6–25 USDT power supply 8–12
drive positions 6–19 USDT system board 8–12
expansion card guide removal and replacement connector pin assignments A–1 to A–10
6–18 conversion
expansion card removal and replacement 6–13 CMT desktop to minitower 6–39
expansion card retainer latch removal and CMT minitower to desktop 6–42
replacement 6–16 Convertible Minitower See CMT
expansion slot cover removal and replacement country-specific power cord set requirements B–2
6–13, 6–16 cover lock, smart 3–24
external security 6–4
D
FailSafe key 6–2
date and time display problems D–2
front bezel removal and replacement 6–6
DDR2 memory F–1
front I/O device removal and replacement 6–26
deleting password 3–21
hard drive cable removal and replacement 6–20
delimiter characters, table 3–22
hard drive removal and replacement 6–20
device drivers, installing 1–1
heatsink removal and replacement 6–33
diagnostic tool for hard drives 3–26
hood sensor removal and replacement 6–3
diagnostics utility 2–14 to 2–18
memory removal and replacement 6–11
DIMMs F–1
minitower to desktop conversion 6–42
disassembly preparation
optical drive removal and replacement 6–22
CMT 6–1
padlock removal and replacement 6–4
SFF 7–1
PCI Express card removal and replacement
USDT 8–1
6–14
diskette drive
PCI retainer latch removal and replacement
CMT removal and replacement 6–25
6–16
SFF removal and replacement 7–25
power supply removal and replacement 6–37
diskette drive bezel
power switch assembly removal and
CMT removal and replacement 6–8
replacement 6–27
SFF removal and replacement 7–8
preparation for disassembly 6–1
drive
processor removal and replacement 6–34
CMT diskette drive removal and replacement
Smart Cover Lock removal and replacement 6–2
6–25
speaker removal and replacement 6–35
CMT hard drive removal and replacement 6–20
system board connections 6–10
CMT optical drive removal and replacement
system board removal and replacement 6–28
6–22
tamper-proof screws 6–2
hard drive capacities 4–3
computer cleaning 5–6
hard drive partition size 4–3
computer cover, SFF removal and replacement 7–7
protecting 3–26
computer pauses D–2
SFF external removal and replacement 7–25
Computer Setup
SFF hard drive removal and replacement 7–27
accessing 2–3
SFF optical drive removal and replacement
Advanced menu 2–11
7–23
File menu 2–4

Index–2 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Index

SFF, external, removal and replacement 7–25 F


USDT hard drive removal and replacement FailSafe key 3–25
8–18 CMT 6–2
USDT optical drive removal and replacement SFF 7–2
8–5 fan shroud, SFF removal and replacement 7–30
drive bezel fan, power supply 5–7
CMT removal and replacement 6–7 Fault Notification and Recovery 3–26
SFF removal and replacement 7–8 fingerprint identification technology 3–26
drive bezel inserts flashing LEDs C–9
CMT 6–7 front bezel
SFF 7–9 CMT removal and replacement 6–6
drive key, problem solving D–31 USDT removal and replacement 8–7
drive positions front I/O device
CMT 6–19 CMT removal and replacement 6–26
SFF 7–22 SFF removal and replacement 7–31
Drivelock security 3–22 USDT removal and replacement 8–20
dual-state power button 3–15
G
DVI pin assignments A–10
general power cord set requirements B–1
E grounding methods 5–4
electrostatic discharge. See ESD
H
entering
hard drive
power-on password 3–20
capacities 4–3
setup password 3–20
CMT removal and replacement 6–20
error messages, POST C–1 to C–13
diagnostic tool 3–26
ESD (electrostatic discharge)
proper handling 5–8
materials and equipment 5–4
SATA characteristics 4–1
preventing damage 5–3
SFF removal and relacement 7–27
Ethernet
USDT removal and replacement 8–18
AUI pin assignments A–2
hardware, Proactive Change Notification (PCN)
BNC pin assignments A–1
3–8
RJ-45 pin assignments A–2
headphone pin assignments A–3
expansion card
heatsink
CMT guide removal and replacement 6–18
CMT removal and replacement 6–33
CMT PCI Express removal and replacement
SFF removal and replacement 7–32
6–14
USDT removal and replacement 8–21
CMT removal and replacement 6–13
hood sensor
SFF PCI Express removal and replacement 7–16
CMT removal and replacement 6–3
SFF removal and replacement 7–14
SFF removal and replacement 7–4
SFF retainer removal and replacement 7–13
HP Backup and Recovery Manager 1–2, 3–2
USDT removal and replacement 8–15
HP Client Foundation Suite 3–5
USDTcage removal and replacement 8–14
HP Client Manager 3–4
expansion card retaining latch, USDT removal and
HP Client Premium Suite 3–5
replacement 8–17
HP Insight Diagnostics 2–14 to 2–18
expansion slot cover
HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager 3–6
CMT removal and replacement 6–13
HP OpenView PC Management Solution 3–6
SFF removal and replacement 7–14
HP OpenView See HP OpenView
external 3.5-inch drive
HP ProtectTools Security Manager 3–5
SFF removal and replacement 7–25
HP System Software Manager 3–4
HPQFlash 3–10

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 Index–3


Index

I USDT removal and replacement 8–5


image deployment methods 3–1 overheating, prevention 5–5
infrared (IR) transceiver, external, pin assignments P
A–4 padlock
initial configuration 3–1 CMT 6–4
Insight Diagnostics 2–14 to 2–18 SFF 7–6
Intel Active Management Technology 3–7 USDT 8–3
K parallel interface pin assignments A–2
key, FailSafe 3–25 partition, hard drive 4–3
keyboard password
cleaning 5–6 changing 3–21
delimiter characters, national 3–22 clearing 3–22
pin assignments A–1 deleting 3–21
options 2–8
L
power-on 2–8, 3–20
LEDs
security 3–19
blinking power C–9
setup 2–8, 3–19, 3–20
blinking PS/2 keyboard C–9
PCI expansion card cage, USDT 8–14
line-in audio pin assignments A–3
PCI Express expansion card
line-out audio pin assignments A–4
CMT removal and replacement 6–14
locking Smart Cover Lock 3–25
SFF removal and replacement 7–16
M USDT cage 8–14
memory USDT removal and replacement 8–15
CMT removal and replacement 6–11 PCI Express pin assignments A–8
DDR2 specifications F–1 PCN (Proactive Change Notification) 3–8
problem solving D–27 POST error messages C–1 to C–13
SFF removal and replacement 7–12 power button
socket assignments F–2 configuring 3–15
USDT removal and replacement 8–13 dual-state 3–15
microphone pin assignments A–3 power cord set requirements
monitor country specific B–2
blank screen D–13 general B–1
blurry video D–15 power supply
cleaning 5–7 CMT removal and replacement 6–37
dim characters D–15 fan 5–7
pin assignments A–4 SFF removal and replacement 7–36
mouse surge-tolerant 3–26
pin assignments A–1 USDT connections 8–12
mouse cleaning 5–7 USDT removal and replacement 8–24
power switch assembly
N
CMT removal and replacement 6–27
national keyboard delimiter characters 3–22
SFF removal and replacement 7–44
notification of hardware and software changes
power-on password
(PCN) 3–8
changing 3–21
O deleting 3–21
operating guidelines 5–5 entering 3–20
optical drive Power-On Self-Test (POST) 2–1
CMT removal and replacement 6–22 Preboot Execution Environment (PXE) 3–3
SFF removal and replacement 7–23 Proactive Change Notification (PCN) 3–8

Index–4 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Index

problems, solving CMT expansion slot cover 6–13, 6–16


audio D–17 CMT front bezel 6–6
CD-ROM and DVD drives D–29 CMT front I/O device 6–26
diskette D–7 CMT hard drive 6–20
display D–13 CMT hard drive cable 6–20
drive key D–31 CMT heatsink 6–33
front panel components D–32 CMT hood sensor 6–3
hard drive D–9 CMT memory 6–11
hardware installation D–22 CMT optical drive 6–22
Internet access D–33 CMT padlock 6–4
keyboard D–20 CMT PCI Express card 6–14
media card reader D–11 CMT PCI retainer latch 6–16
memory D–27 CMT power supply 6–37
mouse D–20 CMT power switch assembly 6–27
network D–24 CMT processor 6–34
optical drives D–29 CMT Smart Cover Lock 6–2
power supply D–5 CMT speaker 6–35
printer D–19 CMT system board 6–28
processor D–28 SFF backwall 7–17
software D–35 SFF battery 7–45
Wake-on-LAN D–24 SFF bezel insert 7–8
processor SFF cable lock 7–5
CMT removal and replacement 6–34 SFF chassis fan 7–38
problem solving D–28 SFF computer cover 7–7
SFF removal and replacement 7–33 SFF drive bezel 7–8
USDT removal and replacement 8–22 SFF expansion card 7–14
protecting ROM BIOS 3–9 SFF expansion card retainer 7–13
PXE (Preboot Execution Environment) 3–3 SFF external 3.5-inch drive 7–25
SFF fan shroud 7–30
R
SFF front I/O device 7–31
recovery
SFF hard drive 7–27
configuration settings 2–14
SFF heatsink 7–32
creating disc recovery set 1–2
SFF hood sensor 7–4
software 3–1
SFF memory 7–12
reference designators ?? to E–4
SFF optical drive 7–23
reference designators E–1
SFF padlock 7–6
Remote ROM BIOS Flash 3–9
SFF PCI Express expansion card 7–16
remote setup 3–3
SFF power supply 7–36
Remote System Installation 3–3
SFF power switch assembly 7–44
removal and replacement
SFF processor 7–33
CMT 5.25" drive bezel 6–7
SFF riser card assembly 7–17
CMT access panel 6–5
SFF Smart Cover Lock 7–2
CMT battery 6–29
SFF speaker 7–35
CMT bezel blank 6–8
SFF system board 7–39
CMT cable lock 6–4
USDT access panel 8–4
CMT chassis fan 6–36
USDT battery 8–26
CMT diskette drive 6–25
USDT cable lock 8–3
CMT diskette drive bezel 6–8
USDT chassis fan 8–9
CMT expansion card 6–13
USDT expansion card 8–15
CMT expansion card guide 6–18
USDT expansion card retaining latch 8–17

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 Index–5


Index

USDT front bezel 8–7 setting 3–19


USDT front I/O device 8–20 setup, Windows 1–1
USDT hard drive 8–18 SFF
USDT heatsink assembly 8–21 backwall removal and replacement 7–17
USDT memory 8–13 battery removal and replacement 7–45
USDT optical drive 8–5 bezel insert removal and replacement 7–8
USDT padlock 8–3 cable connections 7–11
USDT PCI Express expansion card 8–15 cable lock removal and replacement 7–5
USDT power supply 8–24 cable management 7–10
USDT processor 8–22 chassis fan removal and replacement 7–38
USDT riser board 8–14 chassis, illustrated 5–2
USDT speaker 8–10 computer cover removal and replacement 7–7
USDT system board 8–25 disassembly preparation 7–1
replicating the setup 3–11 to 3–15 drive bezel inserts 7–9
Restore Plus! CD 1–2 drive bezel removal and replacement 7–8
retired solutions 3–9 drive positions 7–22
riser board expansion card removal and replacement 7–14
reference designators E–1 expansion card retainer removal and
SFF removal and replacement 7–17 replacement 7–13
USDT removal and replacement 8–14 external 3.5-inch drive removal and replacement
riser card,SFF removal and replacement 7–17 7–25
ROM flash, BIOS, ROM 3–9 external drive removal and replacement 7–25
external security 7–5
S
FailSafe key 7–2
safety precautions, cleaning 5–6
fan shroud removal and replacement 7–30
SATA
front I/O device removal and replacement 7–31
connectors on system board 4–1
hard drive removal and replacement 7–27
data cable pinouts 4–2
heatsink removal and replacement 7–32
hard drive characteristics 4–1
hood sensor removal and replacement 7–4
pin assignments A–7
memory removal and replacement 7–12
power cable pinouts 4–2
optical drive removal and replacement 7–23
screws, correct size 5–8
padlock removal and replacement 7–6
SDRAM (synchronous dynamic random access
PCI Express expansion card removal and
memory) F–1
replacement 7–16
security
power supply removal and replacement 7–36
CMT 6–4
power switch assembly removal and
DriveLock 3–22
replacement 7–44
fingerprint identification technology 3–26
preparation for disassembly 7–1
HP ProtectTools Security Manager 3–5
processor removal and replacement 7–33
password 3–19
riser card assembly removal and replacement
SFF 7–5
7–17
USDT 8–3
Smart Cover Lock removal and replacement 7–2
security features
speaker removal and replacement 7–35
overview 3–17
system board connections 7–11
serial interface pin assignments A–3
system board removal and replacement 7–39
service considerations 5–7
tamper-proof screws 7–2
setup password
Small Form Factor. See SFF
changing 3–21
Smart Cover Lock
deleting 3–21
CMT removal and replacement 6–2
entering 3–20
locking 3–25

Index–6 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700


Index

SFF removal and replacement 7–2 T


unlocking 3–25 tamper-proof screws
Smart Cover Sensor CMT 6–2
protection levels 3–24 SFF 7–2
setting 3–24 tool 5–7
software temperature control 5–5
Altiris Deployment Solution Agent 3–2 thermal sensor 3–26
asset tracking 3–16 tools, servicing 5–7
Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode 3–10 Torx T-15 screwdriver 5–7
Computer Setup Utilities 2–1 troubleshooting D–1 to D–35
Drive Protection System 3–26
U
Fault Notification and Recovery 3–26
Ultra-Slim Desktop See USDT
HP Backup and Recovery Manager 1–2, 3–2
unlocking Smart Cover Lock 3–25
HP Client Foundation Suite 3–5
USB pin assignments A–3
HP Client Manger 3–4
USDT
HP Client Premium Suite 3–5
access panel removal and replacement 8–4
HP Insight Diagnostics 2–14 to 2–18
battery removal and replacement 8–26
HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager
cable connections 8–12
3–6
cable lock removal and replacement 8–3
HP OpenView Management Solution 3–6
cable management 8–11
HP ProtectTools Security Manager 3–5
chassis fan removal and replacement 8–9
HP System Software Manager 3–4
chassis illustrated 5–2
HPQFlash 3–10
disassembly preparation 8–1
image deployment 3–1
expansion card cages 8–14
Intel Active Management Technology 3–7
expansion card removal and replacement 8–15
Proactive Change Notification (PCN) 3–8
expansion card retaining latch removal and
recovery 3–1
replacement 8–17
Remote ROM BIOS Flash 3–9
external security 8–3
Remote System Installation 3–3
front bezel removal and replacement 8–7
Restore Plus! CD 1–2
front I/O device removal and replacement 8–20
retired solutions 3–9
hard drive removal and replacement 8–18
servicing computer 5–7
heatsink assembly removal and replacement
Subscriber’s Choice 3–9
8–21
updating and management 3–3
memory removal and replacement 8–13
spare part number
optical drive removal and replacement 8–5
tamper resistant wrench 5–7
padlock removal and replacement 8–3
Torx T-15 screwdriver 5–7
PCI expansion card cage 8–14
speaker
PCI Express expansion card cage 8–14
CMT removal and replacement 6–35
PCI Express expansion card removal and
SFF removal and replacement 7–35
replacement 8–15
USDT removal and replacement 8–10
power supply connections 8–12
static electricity 5–3
power supply removal and replacement 8–24
Subscriber’s Choice 3–9
preparation for disassembly 8–1
surge-tolerant power supply 3–26
processor removal and replacement 8–22
system board
riser board removal and replacement 8–14
CMT removal and replacement 6–28
speaker removal and replacement 8–10
reference designators E–1
system board connections 8–12
SATA connectors 4–1
system board removal and replacement 8–25
SFF removal and replacement 7–39
USDT removal and replacement 8–25

Service Reference Guide, dc7700 433612-001 Index–7


Index

V Proactive Change Notification (PCN) 3–8


ventilation, proper 5–5 Remote ROM BIOS Flash 3–9
replicating setup 3–12
W
replicating setup, BIOS utility 3–12
Wake-on-LAN feature D–24
Restore Plus! CD 1–2
Web sites
ROM BIOS Flash 3–9
HP Client Foundation Suite 3–5
Subscriber’s Choice 3–9
HP Client Management Premium Suite 3–5
support software 3–16
HP Client Manager 3–5
support software CD subscription 1–1
HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager
wrench, tamper-resistant
3–6
CMT 6–2
HP OpenView Management Suite 3–6
SFF 7–2
HP ProtectTools Security Manager 3–5
HPQFlash 3–10

Index–8 433612-001 Service Reference Guide, dc7700

You might also like